Univerge 2000 IPS General Desc 3800 R13

Univerge 2000 IPS General Desc 3800 R13
19
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS
Family of Products
General Description
March, 2007
ISSUE 6
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or
features, at any time, without notice.
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and
customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. and
shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
UNIVERGE®, NEAX® and Dterm® are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation. Microsoft® is
a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. Intel® is a registered trademark of Intel
Corporation. All other product references and/or company references are registered
trademarks or trademarked for their respective products and/or company.
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description Guide has been developed to provide
information on the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS. The information provided has been compiled
from a variety of available documentation and has been consolidated into a single manual.
Information concerning questions not covered in this guide, corrections and/or comments are
most welcome and should be sent to:
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Product Management
6555 North State Highway 161
Irving, TX 75039-2402
http://www.necunifiedsolutions.com
Copyright 2007
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc.
Printed in the U.S.A
REGULATORY INFORMATION ....................................................................................................1
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................................1
FCC PART 15 REQUIREMENTS.........................................................................................................1
FCC PART 68 REGISTRATION ..........................................................................................................2
DIRECT-INWARD DIALING (DID) CALLS ............................................................................................5
REGULATORY INFORMATION ON ANALOG TELEPHONES ..................................................................5
HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY ............................................................................................................6
INDUSTRY CANADA CS-03 ................................................................................................................6
SAFETY CERTIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................7
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ......................................................................................................................8
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................10
SYSTEM INFORMATION – UNIVERGE NEAX®2000 IPS .............................................................10
HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................................................................................12
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE .............................................................................................................15
TECHNICAL TERMS...........................................................................................................................17
TRUNKING DIAGRAM ........................................................................................................................18
UNIVERGE NEAX® 2000 IPSDML ................................................................................................19
UNIVERGE NEAX® 2000 IPSDMR ...............................................................................................20
REMOTE PIM OVER IP.....................................................................................................................21
CHAPTER 2
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .............................................................................25
MODULE CONFIGURATION ...............................................................................................................25
INSTALLATION METHODS .................................................................................................................27
MODULES AND INSTALLATION HARDWARE ......................................................................................30
CIRCUIT CARDS................................................................................................................................33
IPS SYSTEM CONDITIONS ...............................................................................................................34
UNIVERGE NEAX® IPSDML SYSTEM CONFIGURATION................................................................38
UNIVERGE NEAX® IPSDMR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ...............................................................41
REMOTE PIM OVER IP SYSTEM OUTLINE .......................................................................................43
REMOTE PIM OVER IP SYSTEM CONDITIONS.................................................................................44
CHAPTER 3
TERMINALS .........................................................................................................49
SN716 DESK CON ..........................................................................................................................50
DTERM SERIES I ANALOG TERMINALS .............................................................................................55
DTERM SERIES I (IP) TERMINALS ....................................................................................................57
DTERM SERIES I (TDM) DIGITAL TERMINALS .................................................................................62
DTERM SERIES E (TDM) DIGITAL TERMINALS ...............................................................................68
DTERM CORDLESS TERMINALS .......................................................................................................74
WIRELESS DTERM PS HANDSET.....................................................................................................78
DTERM SOFTPHONE (SP30)...........................................................................................................81
INASETTM .......................................................................................................................................87
CHAPTER 4
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION ............................................................................90
MODULES .........................................................................................................................................90
INSTALLATION HARDWARE ...............................................................................................................91
SYSTEM POWER...............................................................................................................................92
COMMON CONTROL CARDS.............................................................................................................93
LINE/TRUNK (LT) CARDS ................................................................................................................95
APPLICATION PROCESSOR (AP) CARDS .........................................................................................98
CHAPTER 5
FEATURE DESCRIPTION................................................................................101
BUSINESS/HOTEL MOTEL FEATURES ............................................................................................101
CCIS FEATURES ...........................................................................................................................135
ISDN FEATURES ...........................................................................................................................142
WIRELESS FEATURES ....................................................................................................................144
CHAPTER 6 SYSTEM OVERVIEW............................................................................................147
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ...........................................................................................................147
GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................147
AC POWER REQUIREMENTS .........................................................................................................148
INSTALLATION .................................................................................................................................148
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION .............................................................................................................149
MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................................150
MP PROGRAM DOWNLOAD ...........................................................................................................154
MA4000 MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ..................................................................................................157
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS DOCUMENTATION LIST................................................................160
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................161
PROCESSORS.................................................................................................................................161
POWER ...........................................................................................................................................166
SYSTEM CAPACITY.........................................................................................................................168
IP REMOTE NETWORK CAPACITY .................................................................................................174
IP SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................178
UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML/IPSDMR SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................179
LINE CONDITIONS ...........................................................................................................................180
ZONE TRANSCEIVER LINE CONDITIONS.........................................................................................181
TRAFFIC CAPACITY ........................................................................................................................182
DRS (DEVICE REGISTRATION SERVER) .......................................................................................182
CHAPTER 8
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE ..............................................................................183
TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS................................................................................................183
ROTARY DIAL PULSE AND DTMF SIGNALING ...............................................................................184
AUDIBLE TONES AND RINGING SIGNAL .........................................................................................186
BUILT-IN MODEM ON MP CARD ....................................................................................................186
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT .............................................................................................................187
Regulatory Information
Regulatory Requirements
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) has established rules that permit the
PBX to be directly connected to the telephone network. A jack is provided on party lines
or coin lines.
The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures. If
such changes affect the compatibility or use of the PBX, the telephone company must
provide adequate notice of the changes.
This equipment complies with the requirements in Part 15 of FCC Rules for a Class A
computing device. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause
unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception requiring the operator to take
whatever steps are necessary to correct this interference.
FCC Part 15 Requirements
In compliance with FCC Part 15 Rules, the following statement is provided:
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of
FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference when operated in a commercial environment. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference in which case the
user at his own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be
required to correct the interference.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 1
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Part 68 Registration
Company Notification
Before installing the PBX to the telephone network, the telephone company must be
provided with the following:
• Your telephone number
• The FCC registration numbers:
JAPAN
USA
PBX
AY5JPN-20542-PF-E
AY5USA-21582-PF-E
Hybrid
AY5JPN-20543-MF-E
AY5USA-21583-MF-E
Key System
AY5JPN-20586-KF-E
AY5USA-21584-KF-E
The Ringer Equivalence Number is 1.6B; the required USOC jacks are RJ21X, RJ2EX,
RJ2GX, and RJ49C.
Note: Limitations on features exist if the system is registered as a KF system. Refer to
Features and Specifications for details.
Location of FCC Compliance Labels
Labels stating the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS FCC registration number and compliance
with FCC Parts 15 and 68 are attached on the inside of the system's front cover. Label
examples are as follows:
“This equipment complies with the requirements in Part 15 of FCC Rules for a Class A
computing device. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause
unacceptable interference to radio and TV reception requiring the operator to take
whatever steps are necessary to correct the interference.”
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS
Complies With Part 68 FCC Rules
FCC Registration Numbers
Ringer Equivalence: 1.6B
NEC Unified Solutions, Inc. MADE IN USA
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 2
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Requirements for Private Line Operations
In order to connect this system to the private line network, provide the telephone
company with:
• The quantities and USOC numbers of the required jacks (See the following table.)
• The sequence in which the trunks are to be connected
• The facility interface codes by position
• The Ringer Equivalence Number or service order code, as applicable, by position
Mfg's
Port ID
Facility Interface
Code
Network
Jacks
PN-8COTS
PN-8COTQ
PN-4DIDA
PN-AUCA
PN-AUCA
PZ-8PFTA
PN-40DTA
PN-40DTA
PN-24DTA-C
PN-24DTA-C
PN-24DTA-C
PN-24DTA-C
PN-24DTA-C
PN-DTA (PRT)
PN-DTA (PRT)
PN-DTA (PRT)
PN-DTA (PRT)
PN-DTA (PRT)
PN-DTA (CCT)
PN-DTA (CCT)
PN-DTA (CCT)
PN-DTA (CCT)
PN-DTA (CCT)
PN-4BRT
02GS2
02LS2
02RV2-T
02RV2-T
0L13A, 0L13B, 0L13C
02LS2
TL11M
TL31M
04DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU9-1SN
04DU9-1ZN
05DU9-BN
04DU9-BN
04DU9-1KN
04DU9-1SN
04DU9-1ZN
04DU9-BN
04DU9-DN
04DU9-1KN
04DU9-1SN
04DU9-1ZN
02IS5
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ21X
RJ2EX
RJ2GX
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Service Order
Code
9.0F
9.0F
9.0F
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0P
6.0Y
Page 3
REGULATORY INFORMATION
Service Requirements
In the event of equipment malfunction, all repairs will be performed by NEC or an
authorized distributor. It is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need
for service to NEC or to one of their authorized distributors.
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact NEC Unified Solutions,
Inc., at 800-TEAM NEC (800-832-6632) for repair and/or warranty information. If the
trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request
that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved.
If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will
notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If
advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer as soon
as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if
you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations, or
procedures that affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the telephone
company will provide advance notice so that you can make necessary modifications in
order to maintain uninterrupted service.
NO REPAIRS CAN BE DONE BY THE CUSTOMER.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 4
REGULATORY INFORMATION
Direct-Inward Dialing (DID) Calls
Allowing this equipment to be operated in such a manner as to not provide for proper
answer supervision is a violation of Part 68 of the FCC's rules.
PROPER ANSWER SUPERVISION IS WHEN:
a.) This equipment returns answer supervision to the PSTN when DID calls are:
Answered by the called station
Answered by the attendant
Routed to a recorded announcement that can be administered by the CPE user
Routed to a dial prompt
b.) This equipment returns answer supervision on all DID calls forwarded to the PSTN.
Permissible exceptions are:
A call is unanswered
A busy tone is received
A reorder tone is received
EQUAL ACCESS REQUIREMENTS
This equipment is capable of providing users access to interstate providers of operator
services through the use of access codes. Modification of this equipment by call
aggregators to block access dialing codes is a violation of the Telephone Operator
Consumers Act of 1990.
Caution: The use of a monitoring, recording or listening devices to eavesdrop, monitor
or record telephone conversations or other sound activities, whether or not
contemporaneous with its transmission, may be illegal in certain
circumstances under federal or state laws. Legal advice should be sought
prior to implementing any practice that monitors or records any telephone
conversation. Some federal and state laws require some form of notification
to all parties to the telephone conversation, such as using a beep tone or
other notification methods or require the consent of all parties to the
telephone conversation, prior to monitoring or recording a telephone
conversation. Some of these laws incorporate strict penalties.
Regulatory Information On Analog Telephones
NEC single-line telephones comply with Part 68 of FCC Rules. On the bottom of the
equipment is a label that states, among other information, the FCC registration number
and ringer equivalence number (REN) for the equipment. If requested, this information
should be provided to the telephone company.
The equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ11C.
The equipment should be used only behind a PBX or KTS. The REN is used to
determine the number of devices that may be connected to the telephone line. Excessive
RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an
incoming call. In most, but not all, areas, the sum of RENs should not exceed five (5.0).
To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined
by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the maximum REN for
the calling area.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 5
REGULATORY INFORMATION
Hearing Aid Compatibility
The Dterm terminals provided for the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS are hearing aid
compatible. FCC rules prohibit the use of non-hearing aid compatible telephones.
NEC-type single-line telephone sets used in conjunction with the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000
IPS are hearing aid compatible. If other than NEC-type single-line telephone sets are to
be used with this system, ensure that these are hearing aid compatible.
Industry Canada CS-03
Certification number: 140 5976 A
Load Number of the equipment: 1.0
NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. The certification
means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective
operational and safety requirements. The department does not guarantee the equipment
will operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing the equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected
to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The equipment must also be
installed using an acceptable method of connection. In some cases, the company's inside
wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a
certified connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be aware
that compliance with the above conditions might not prevent degradation of service in
some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance
facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or installations made by the user to this
equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the telecommunications company
cause to request that the user disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the
power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if present, are
connected together. This protection may be particularly important in rural areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but should
contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as
appropriate.
NOTICE: The Load Number assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of
the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device, to prevent
overloading. The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices
subject only to the requirement that the total of the load numbers of all the devices does
not exceed 100.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 6
REGULATORY INFORMATION
Safety Certifications
This equipment has been listed by Underwriters Laboratories and found to comply with
all the applicable requirements of the standard for telephone equipment U.L. 1459. This
equipment complies with Canadian Standards Association's standard C 22.2 No. 225.
Safety Considerations
When using telephone equipment, basic safety precautions should always be followed to
reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and injury. Precautions include the following:
Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
Never install a telephone jack in a wet location, unless the jack is specifically
designed for wet locations.
Never touch an uninsulated telephone wire or terminal, unless the telephone line
has been disconnected at the network interface.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Note: More detailed precautions are included in this manual.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 7
REGULATORY INFORMATION
Safety Instructions
1. Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed
for wet locations.
3. Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has
been disconnected at the network interface.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines.
Read and understand all instructions.
Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the product.
Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or
aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
8. Do not use this product near water, for example, under water pipes near a bathtub, sink,
or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool.
9. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious damage to the product.
10. Slots and openings in the cabinet and the back or bottom are provided for ventilation,
to protect it from overheating, these openings must not be blocked or covered. The
openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other
similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat
register. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation unless proper
ventilation is provided.
11. This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the
marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power source available, consult with
your local power company.
12. This product is normally connected with a three-wire grounding type plug, a plug
having a third (grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a grounding type power
outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet,
contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose
of the grounding type plug.
13. Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord. Do not locate this product where the
cord will be abused by persons walking on it.
14. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords as this can result in the risk of fire or
electric shock.
15. Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may
touch dangerous voltage points or short out parts that could result in a risk of fire or
electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.
16. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble this product, but take it to a
qualified serviceman when some service or repair work is required. Opening or
removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect
reassembly can cause electric shock when the appliance is subsequently used.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 8
REGULATORY INFORMATION
17. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service
personnel under the following conditions:
a.) When the power supply cord or plug is damaged or frayed.
b.) If liquid has been spilled into the product.
c.) If the product has been exposed to rain or water.
d.) If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions.
Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions, because
improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often
require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to normal
operation.
e.) If the product has been dropped or the cabinet has been damaged.
f.) If the product exhibits a distinct change in performance.
18. Avoid using a telephone (other than a cordless type) during an electrical storm. There
may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning.
19. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
20. When installing the LC card for providing the analog telephone interface that is
connected to off-premise site, use PN-4LLCB card.
21. Do not install the PN-4ODTA card for providing the analog trunk interface that is
connected to off-premise site.
22. Warning for US and Canada only
WARNING
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 9
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Chapter 1 Introduction
This manual provides an overview of the UNIVERGE NEAX®2000 IPS (Internet Protocol Server)
stored program control digital electronic PBX. An introduction to the technical characteristics is
included, along with a description of available system applications.
System Information – UNIVERGE NEAX®2000 IPS
The UNIVERGE NEAX® 2000 IPS (Internet Protocol Server) is a full-featured IP based
communications system providing a rich feature set with pure Voice over IP (VoIP)
communications (peer to peer connections), across corporate Local and Wide Area Networks
(LAN and WAN). The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS DtermIP telephones are designed to
provide a converged infrastructure at the desktop, with a 100 Base T Ethernet connection to the
LAN and built-in hub for a PC connection to the telephone itself. The system can provide peerto-peer connections between DtermIP telephones with voice compression, offering existing
Dterm Series i telephone features. On the WAN side, the system can provide peer-to-peer
connections over IP networks with the voice compression, on a CCIS basis (CCIS over IP) or
Remote PIM (Remote PIM over IP).
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 10
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can provide legacy station/trunk interfaces to support the
existing Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) based infrastructure, such as analog telephones,
analog networks, and digital networks (T1/E1, ISDN etc.). At maximum configuration, the
system can provide 1020 ports for IP and legacy devices, and 256 ports for Application cards.
Communications between legacy stations/trunks and DtermIP telephones/IP networks are made
via IP PAD, which converts packet-based voice data to TDM-based voice data, and vice versa.
Both peer-to-peer connections and TDM-based connections are controlled the Main Processor
(MP) card. The MP card incorporates a built-in Device Registration Server (DRS) and a single
interface point of IP connection to IP telephone, MATWorX, and OAI/ACD servers.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS users have access to hundreds of service features that are used in
building unique telephony applications that enhance productivity, reduce operating costs and
improve communications efficiently. The innovative modular hardware and software design
allows efficient, effective growth within each module from its minimum to its maximum
configuration. The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS software design is as advanced as its hardware. It
ensures the system will support evolving applications and have the reliability needed to compete
in today's world and into tomorrow's. The software is designed with modularity in mind.
Together, these modular building blocks allow customers to initially buy what they need and add
capacity and capabilities as the business demands, resulting in a greater degree of cost control for
new installations and for upgrades to features, capacities and the software versions.
NEAX 2000 IPS
In-skin VMS
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS
MATWorX
(Via IPT:CCIS)
P
CCIS over IP
COT
LC/DLC
Internet
/Intranet
IP-PAD
MATWorX
(via RS232C)
MP
IPT(H.323
Handler)
PSTN
H.323 GK
Router
WLAN
Controller
Router
NEAX IPSDMR
Switching Hub (100Mbps)
AP
(WLAN)
Router
DtermIP
Switching
Hub
MATWorX
(via LAN)
DHCP
Dterm
OAI
Server Assistant Server
DtermIP
Remote PIM over IP
with Survivability
DtermIP
WLAN Handset
Client PC
Dterm
INASET
Dterm SP30
Figure 1-1 System Outline of an IPS
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 11
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Hardware Architecture
Hybrid System of IP (peer-to-peer connection) and TDM Switching
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS supports both pure IP switching (peer-to-peer connections) and
Time Division Switching (TDM). The pure IP switching is provided for communications
between DtermIPs and for CCIS/Remote PIM connections with another UNIVERGE NEAX 2000
IPS/ UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML/ 2400 IPX. On the other hand, the TDM switching is provided
for communications between legacy stations/trunks. Connections between DtermIP/CCIS or
Remote PIM over IP and legacy stations/trunks are made via IP PADs, which converts packetbased voice data to TDM-based voice data, and vice versa.
Powerful, One-board Main Processor (MP) with Integrated Functionality
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Main Processor (MP) is the heart of pure IP connections and
TDM-based connections. The MP employs a high-speed CPU, which is equivalent with
Pentium. With this processing power and System On Chip (SOC) technology, the MP integrates
Device Registration Server (DRS), and AP01 (OAI) functions. Also, by means of today’s
advanced LSI technology, the MP card size is minimized and On-board Ethernet Interface card is
mounted on the MP without using an additional slot space in the PIM. This interface card is
linked with LAN for call control processing of DtermIP and inter-work with MATWorX and
OAI server.
The MP provides LAN control function, System-based Device Registration Server (DRS), Builtin FP, Built-in OAI, Built-in SMDR, Built-in CCH-IPT, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory
(Basic/Expansion), TDSW (1024 CH × 1024 CH), 16-line CFT, PB Sender, Clock, PLO two
ports (Receiver Mode/Source Mode), two RS-232C Ports, two-line DAT (Recording duration: a
maximum of 128 seconds), DK, 4-line PB Receiver, Modem for remote maintenance (33.6
kbps), internal Music-on-Hold Tone, BUS Interface. BUS Interface functions as a driver/receiver
of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM
BUS. One card is required per system.
Reduced Hardware with IP based Architecture
The DtermIPs connected to the LAN do not require DLC cards because they can be interfaced
directly with the LAN and connected with peer-to-peer basis. When the DtermIP is connected
to a station/trunk that is using TSW, the speech path between LAN and TSW is made via IP
PAD under the call processing control of the MP. The DtermIP can be expanded simply adding
the terminal itself and IP PAD if traffic volume is increased. With this system architecture, the
hardware such as DLC, PIM, Power Supply etc. is reduced and easy moves, adds, and changes
can be realized.
Standard TDM Hardware
Line & Trunk Cards
Application Processors
Firmware Processors
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Peer to Peer IP Hardware
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD
PZ-M606-A
PN-24IPLA IP PAD*
* The PN-24IPLA is a daughter board for the 8IPLA
when up to 32 IP PADs for desired.
Page 12
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Enhanced Built-in Firmware Processor (FP) on MP
The Firmware Processor card (FP) provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768 KB), and
inter-module BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various signals,
adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay timing, and monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS. When
the system consists of three PIMs or more, one each of this card is mounted respectively in PIM
2, PIM 4, and PIM 6.
Extended Application Processor (AP) Port Capacity
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides maximum 256 AP ports and it is independent of the
1020 ports for the Line/Trunk (LT), therefore, more AP cards such as T1/E1 digital link cards
can be used in the system.
Universal Slot
One PIM provides 12 card slots for Line/Trunk (LT). Also, these card slots can be used for
Application Processor (AP) cards without complicated limitation. This makes easy quotation
and installation, and more AP cards can be mounted in one PIM.
Unified Circuit Card Size
All circuit cards for the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS are designed in one size (PN-type), and
installed in the PIM. This maximizes the efficiency of slot utilization of the PIM.
High Density Line/Trunk Cards
The major line/trunk cards used in the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS are provided with 8 circuits
per card. This allows the physical system size to be compact.
DC/DC Power Supply for –48V
The PIM houses optional DC/DC Power Supply for the cards which require –48V power such as
the CSI card used for interface of Zone Transceiver of wireless system. Since this power supply
is mounted in the space under the AC/DC power, no additional Power Module/card slots are
required.
Built-in DRS (Device Registration Server) on MP
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS incorporates DRS (Device Registration Server) on the MP.
DRS provide Log-in/Log-out management of DtermIP including Registration and
Authentication. Also, the built-in DRS can be inter-worked with DHCP server to provide easy
administration on IP address.
Office Data Backup Enhancement
The office data of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is stored in Flash ROM; therefore the backup
period is extended compared with previous IVS series which were using RAM with battery.
Various Installation Methods
To meet the specific needs of the customer’s environment, the UNIVERGE
provides the following installation methods:
NEAX
2000 IPS
Floor Standing Installation
Wall-mounting Installation
IEC standard 19 inch Rack-mounting Installation
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 13
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Station to Station Connection
For DtermIP to DtermIP connection (Peer to Peer connection), the voice data is transmitted and
received directly between DtermIPs on the LAN. For Dterm Legacy terminal connection, the IPPAD card and VCT card are required to transmit and receive the voice data. These cards are
used to control and convert the voice data. The MP card in either of the connections above
manages the control signals.
CCIS Connection
DtermIP to DtermIP connection (Peer to Peer connection) via CCIS is available only when the
destination office is UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS or UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 IPX. The system
provides only Point to Multipoint connection.
Maintenance
MATWorX IPS is used as the maintenance program for the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS. Direct
connection (RS-232C), Modem connection and LAN (TCP/IP) connections are available to
connect to the MAT (Maintenance Administration Terminal).
Dual MP System
The system complies with dual control system on Main Processor.
Note: Since the system employs Cold Standby processing in MP changeover, the calls in
progress are terminated as a result of the MP changeover. Also, during the MP
changeover, the call originating/receiving and service feature access are not effective.
(It takes about 30 to 60 seconds to complete the MP changeover.)
Remote PIM over IP with Survivability
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can have a PIM installed at a remote site through an IP network.
At the main site, the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS/IPSDML is installed and UNIVERGE NEAX 2000
IPS /IPSDMR are installed at the remote site. The main site controls call processing and service
feature access for station users located at both the main and remote sites. When the Remote PIM
cannot be connected with main site due to the IP network and/or main PBX failure, the Remote
PIM initializes the system and re-starts operation by its own Main Processor (survival mode). In
the survival mode, almost all service features are provided to the station users accommodated in
Remote PIM. When the IP network/main PBX recovers, the Remote PIM can be restored to
normal mode with a system initialization by manual operation or automatically (Selectable by
system data setting).
• IPS Remote PIM with CP24-D MP
• IPSDMR with CP31-D MP
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 14
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Software Architecture
UNIVERGE NEAX IPS systems offer Software Keys (TDM and AP) and Peer-to-Peer IP Seat
Licenses, which are designed with modularity in mind. This approach allows customers a greater
degree of cost-control for new installations and for upgrades to features, capacities and software
series.
Installing the UNIVERGE NEAX IPS systems requires activating Basic System software, optional
features key software, and seat licenses. The software is loaded into MP by using MATWorX
IPS. Once the software is loaded, that software cannot be used to OTHER system (Copy
protected). A maximum of 32 Key CD can be loaded per system. If the system is Dual MP
System, the software is required to load on each MP in order to register the software data into
each MP. (Dual MPs are configured with the same serial number)
Generic Program (Basic System Software)
Description
64 Port
System Software
Remarks
Basic Business/Hotel/Motel Features for:
64 LT Ports, 5 T1/DCH, 48 ISDN-BRI Trunks.
NEC Customer Software License
Agreement Required
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 15
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Optional Software
Description
Remarks
IPS Software Key (CD) (Parent Capacity Option)
IPS Software Key (CD)
Compact Disk that holds selected Key files from below
Capacity Option (used w/CD)
LT 64 PORT
64 Port Line/Trunk Key (incremental)
Expands LT Ports from 64 to 1020 Ports in increments
of 64. Software and provides LT Port Licenses in 64
port increments from 64 to1020 ports. Stand alone
system maximum 512 LT ports, Remote PIM Network
maximum 1020 LT ports.
CCIS Link (1)
CCIS Link (4)
CCIS Link (8)
Adds support for one CCIS Link
Adds support for four CCIS Link
Adds support for eight CCIS Link
IPT Card (1)
IPT Card (4)
IPT Card (8)
Adds support for one IP trunk card
Adds support for four IP trunk card
Adds support for eight IP trunk card
Event Based CCIS
(ECCIS) Key
Wireless Software Key
Adds Wireless with support of 128 ZT’s and 256 PS’s
Wireless Software Key 8 PS
Adds 8 Wireless ports each key above the initial 256
T1/PRI Software Key
Expands capacity of T1 to 10 and PRI to 32 spans
IP Remote PIM 1 Site License
Adds IP Remote Capability and is required for each
Remote Site
8 IP Seat License Key
DtermIP terminals are controlled by the CPU and do
not use digital line cards, Instead they require DtermIP
seat licenses. The licenses are available in 8 seat
increments and are cumulative. For example, if you
have 8 existing DtermIP Seats and need a total of 16,
add another 8-seat license for a total of 16 seats.
SP-30-4 Seat License
Each SP-30 4 Seat License can support up to four
simultaneous sessions via the SP-30 Soft-Phone. The
SP30 Soft-Phone also requires IP 8 Seat License. To
support eight simultaneous soft-phone sessions would
require eight Soft-Phone Licenses and 8 IP Seat
Licenses.
SP-30-4 ACD Seat License
Each SP-30 4 ACD Seat License can support up to
four simultaneous sessions via the SP-30 ACD SoftPhone and can support either Business or ACD mode.
The SP30/SP30 ACD Soft-Phone also requires IP Seat
License. To support eight simultaneous soft-phone
sessions would require eight Soft-Phone Licenses plus
8 IP Seat Licenses.
Adds Event Based CCIS capability
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 16
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Technical Terms
SYMBOL
AP00
AUC
BGM
DESCRIPTION
SMDR/Hotel Application Card
Analog Universal Circuit Card
(Long Line Circuit, DID Trunk)
External Music Source for Dterm
Back Ground Music Service
SYMBOL
LC
MAT
DESCRIPTION
Line Circuit Card
(for Single Line Telephone)
Maintenance Administration
Terminal
MDF
Main Distribution Frame
Main Memory
BRT
Basic Rate Interface Trunk Card
MEM
CCH
Common Channel Handler Card
MFR
CFT
32 Circuit Party Conference Trunk
MLDT
CIR
CALLER ID Receiver Trunk Card
MODEM
COT
C.O. Trunk Card
MP
Main Processor Card
CSI
CS/ZT Interface Card
PFT
Power Failure Transfer
ZT
Zone Transceiver
PMS
Property Management System
DAT
Digital Announcement Trunk Card
OAI
Open Application Interface
DCH
D-channel Handler Card
ODT
OD Trunk Card (2/4 wire E&M)
DID Trunk Card
PBR
PB Receiver Card
DID/DIT
DK
DSS
External Relay/Key Interface Card
Digital Line Circuit Card
(for Dterm, DESKCON)
DSS Console
DTI
Digital Trunk Interface Card
DTG
Digital Tone Generator
SMDR
ETHER
Ethernet Control Card
TDSW
DLC
PBSND
PLO
PS
PRT
MF Receiver/ MFC Receiver/
Sender Card
Melody Trunk
Modem
PB Sender
Phase Locked Oscillator
Personal Station
ISDN Primary Rate Interface
Trunk Card
Station Message Detail Recording
Memory Expansion Card
TNT
ICH
ISDN-channel Handler Card
VCT
Time Division Switch
Tone/Music Source
Interface Card
CODEC Card
ILC
ISDN Line Circuit Card
VM
Voice Mail Card
IPT
IP Trunk Card
KEY
External Key
EXPMEM
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 17
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Trunking Diagram
This figure shows a typical trunking diagram of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS system.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 18
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
UNIVERGE NEAX® 2000 IPSDML
The UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML is equipped with all the features and functions of the UNIVERGE
NEAX 2000 IPS, with a smaller space requirement. It is a full-featured PBX that supports
advanced networking, pure peer-to-peer IP telephony connectivity and traditional TDM
switching capabilities. Designed primarily for pure converged IP networks, the UNIVERGE
DML
can also accommodate a mixed (i.e., TDM and IP) converged IP network or
NEAX IPS
standalone solution.
The UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML (Internet Protocol Server Distributed Model) supports up to 952
peer-to-peer IP stations and 56 TDM ports in a single modular chassis. Up to eight chassis can be
stacked providing maximum capacity of 440 TDM ports while still supporting peer-to-peer IP
stations. It uses the same SPN-CP31E and the Main processor. The same line/trunk cards,
application processor cards and software of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS and comes equipped
for 19” rack mounting. It offers superior port density; each chassis only occupies two Rack Units
(2RU).
Characteristics of the UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML
Compact and small size MODULAR CHASSIS
One MODULAR CHASSIS provides 8 card slots /56 LT ports and up to 8 MODULAR
CHASSIS can be used per system. (8 virtual LT ports are available per MODULAR CHASSIS in
addition to 56 LT ports.)
MP (Main Processor)
PN-CP31-E for UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML
Ring Generator Unit (RGU)
Ring Generator Unit (RGU) for the UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML is provided with PZ-PW139 card.
The PZ-PW139 card provides ringing supply to analog SLT.
Power Failure Transfer (PFT)
Power Failure Transfer (PFT) for the UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML is provided with PZ-4PFTA card.
The PZ-8PFTB for the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is not available for the IPSDML.
Installation Methods
The UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML can be installed on the desktop or into the 19-inch rack. Wall
Mount Installation is not available.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 19
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
UNIVERGE NEAX® 2000 IPSDMR
The UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDMR (Internet Protocol Server Distributed Model Remote) is a
UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML that has been optimized for Remote PIM over IP applications. The
UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDMR uses the SPN-CP31-D as the Main Processor. This system targets
users who have up to 30 relatively small offices that accommodate 10-30 extensions at the
Remote Site.
The MP card at Remote Site has the same system data as that at Main Site, because Remote Site
automatically gets the data from Main Site at the time of setup. In normal operation, Main Site
automatically copies the system data to Remote Site through the network once a day.
Because the CP31-D is a cost down CPU, the following options that are built-in on the CP24 are
not available with the CP31:
•
•
•
•
No built-in DAT.
Only one RS Port.
No built-in DK (external/relay key).
No MN Alarm Indication
System Outline
• The MP card at Main Site controls system processing, and Remote Site follows the Main
Site.
• Remote Site can accommodate most terminals and trunks such as Dterm, Single-Line
telephone, PS, DtermIP, COT, ISDN, etc. The Attendant Console, Dterm Attendant
position, and Add-on Module are not supported at the Remote Site.
• Local Switch (TDSW) at Remote Site controls connections within the Remote Site if
possible.
• In the case of connections between Main-Remote and Remote-Remote, the voice path is
connected via Peer-to-Peer or IP-PAD.
• If the communications between Main-Remote are interrupted, the Remote Site survives
by itself after the system reset.
Advantages
• The system regards the terminals accommodated in both Main Site and Remote Site as
the extensions in the same office. Therefore, the service transparency is superior to CCIS.
• Remote PIM over IP has no limitation of distance between Main and Remote.
• Remote Site has a switching function at local. This provides the effective configuration
of C.O. line. In addition, the Remote Site can accommodate AP cards. This is an
advantage to accommodate ISDN lines especially.
• The Remote Site survives by itself even if the link between Main and Remote is
disconnected. Therefore, the impact to users at Remote Site will be smaller if the link
between Main and Remote is disconnected.
• This feature can reduce the bandwidth used on the WAN that is connected to CO lines at
Remote Site, rather than DtermIP at remote location or the Media Converter (MC)
accommodation.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 20
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Remote PIM over IP
Remote PIM over IP targets users who have 1-30 relatively small offices that accommodate 1030 extensions at the Remote Site. When UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDMR and UNIVERGE NEAX 2000
IPS PIM are installed at remote site, and connected to a UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS or
UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML at main site over IP network, the Main Site system controls and
maintains the remote DMR and PIM operation as one single system. If a communication failure
occurs between the Main Site and Remote Site, the Remote Site automatically changes over to a
survival mode and operates as a stand-alone system.
IPSDMR: IPS Distributed Model Remote (with CP31-D)
IPS PIM: IPS Distributed Model (with CP24-D)
•
•
The UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDMR is designed primarily for distributed IP networking but also
supports traditional analog and digital trunks for connection to the Public Switched Telephone
Network (PSTN). The UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDMR supports up to 128 peer-to-peer IP stations and
56 TDM ports in a single modular chassis. Up to two chassis can be stacked providing maximum
capacity of 112 TDM ports while still supporting as many as 128 peer-to-peer IP stations.
Note: The MP card at Remote Site has the same system data as the CPU at the Host Site; the
Host Site automatically downloads system data to the Remote Site at the time of setup. In normal
operation, Main Site automatically downloads a copy the system data to Remote Site through the
network once a day.
Because the CP31-D is designed as a Remote PIM CPU, the following options that are built-in
on the CP24 are not available with the CP31:
•
•
•
•
No built-in DAT
Only one RS Port
No built-in DK (external/relay key)
No MN Alarm Indication
Network Conditions and Payload
Item
Requirement
Protocol
TCP/IP transparent
Maximum
Delay Time
120ms(one way)/240ms(return)
150ms(one way)/300ms(return)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Remarks
Support the quality
class A, B of IP
Telephone
Page 21
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Bandwidth Requirement
With G7.23.1
(5.3k/6.3k)
Compression
With G729a ( 8k)
Compression
Without
Compression
(G.711)
Control
4.1 Kbps
4.1 Kbps
4.1 Kbps
Voice
31.8/37.8 Kbps
48 Kbps
432 Kbps
Control
4.3 Kbps
4.3 Kbps
4.3 Kbps
Voice
42.4/50.4 Kbps
64 Kbps
576 Kbps
Control
4.3 Kbps
4.3 Kbps
4.3 Kbps
Voice
63.6/75.6 Kbps
96 Kbps
864 Kbps
Control
4.5 Kbps
4.5 Kbps
4.5 Kbps
Voice
84.8/100.8 Kbps
128 Kbps
1152 Kbps
Control
4.5 Kbps
4.5 Kbps
4.5 Kbps
Voice
127.2/151.2 Kbps
192 Kbps
1728 Kbps
Control
4.9 Kbps
4.9 Kbps
4.9 Kbps
Voice
169.6/201.6 Kbps
256 Kbps
2304 Kbps
Control
4.9 Kbps
4.9 Kbps
4.9 Kbps
Voice
254.4/302.4 Kbps
384 Kbps
3456 Kbps
Control
5.8 Kbps
5.8 Kbps
5.8 Kbps
Voice
339.2/403.2 Kbps
512 Kbps
4608 Kbps
Control
5.8 Kbps
5.8 Kbps
5.8Kbps
Voice
381.6/453.6 Kbps
576 Kbps
5184 Kbps
Control
6.7 Kbps
6.7 Kbps
6.7 Kbps
Established
Voice Calls
6
8
12
16
24
32
48
64
72
96
Voice
508.8/604.8 Kbps
768 Kbps
6912 Kbps
Note: This information is an estimation based on an established call. Slightly Higher Control values
will occur at time of call origination and termination.
Base values
• Originating from a station: 9.6 Kbps/Call (estimated)
• Terminating to a station: 5.76 Kbps /Call (estimated)
• Originating to C.O: 11.5 Kbps/Call (estimated)
• Terminating from C.O: 5.76 Kbps/Call (estimated)
• Keep Alive to Remote Site: 0.032Kbps (estimated)
• Other control packets for Remote Site: 4Kbps (estimated)
• G.723.1 voice: 5.3Kbps (one-way)
• G.729a voice: 8Kbps (one-way)
• G.711 voice: 64Kbps (one-way)
The above base values are primarily used for call setup with the exception of keep alive;
0.032Kbps with no voice traffic. Connections between IP PAD are half duplex, established call
utilization is G.711 voice: 64Kbps, G.723.1 voice: 5.3/6.3Kbps, or G729a voice: 8Kbps. Peerto-Peer IP station calls are full duplex, compression can be specified by location numbers in
system data. Peer-to Peer IP station calls even though full duplex will utilize one-way for Bidirectional networks such as T1. Peer-to Peer IP station calls over Asymmetrical networks such
as ADSL may realize higher bandwidth utilization, compression can be specified by location
numbers in system data.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 22
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Advantages
The system regards the terminals accommodated in both Host Site and Remote Site as the
extensions in the same office. Feature transparency is superior to CCIS.
Remote PIM over IP can accommodate AP cards such as ISDN PRI and T1.
This feature can reduce the bandwidth used on the WAN that is connected to CO lines at Remote
Site, rather than Dterm IP at remote locations.
Since all Remote PIM over IP sites are treated as extensions in the same office, software and
applications only have to be implemented in the host site. This provides centralized use of
application for example distributing ACD agents in the DMR locations. CCIS requires each
location to have separate software and applications.
CCIS over IP can be combined with Remote PIM over IP to accommodate larger network
configurations. Up to 255 host sites can be connected via CCIS, each host site can have up to 30
Remote PIM over IP locations.
Service Conditions
1. Host site can be UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS, UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML, or UNIVERGE
NEAX 2000 Retrofit system. Remote PIM over IP is available in any combination of the
following CPUs.
Main Site: CP24-D, CP27-B, CP31E, CP26-B, CP28-B
Remote Site: CP31-D, CP24-D, CP26-D
2. Software and Key CD for the whole system must be loaded at the Host Site. No software
or key’s can be loaded into the Remote Site.
3. All system data changes for the whole system must be performed in the Host Site. No
system data changes can be done in the Remote Site.
4. The CPU card at Remote Site has the same system data as the CPU at Main Site; the Host
Site automatically downloads its system data to the Remote Site at the time of setup. In
normal operation, Host Site automatically copies the system data to Remote Site through
the network once a day.
5. Remote Site automatically operates by itself (survival mode) when Keep Alive signal
(sent every 30 sec) between the Host Site and Remote Sits is interrupted. When Keep
Alive is interrupted the Remote Site is reset to change the operation from normal mode to
survival mode.
6. Remote Site in survival mode checks at 30 seconds intervals if the communications to
Main Site are possible. When Keep Alive is detected, the Remote Site automatically is
reset to change the operation from survival mode to normal mode.
7. When unstable conditions occur in the network, the Remote Site can be manually set to
survivable mode (override automatic) until stability in the network is established. This
prevents the Remote Site from resetting normal mode to survivable mode etc.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 23
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
Required Hardware and Software
Host Site
Equipment Name
Remarks
PZ-M606-A
On board Ethernet Interface card
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD
8 Port PAD with built-in compression
PZ-24IPLA
24 Port PAD Expansion, mounts on SPN-8IPLA
R-PIM 1 Site License
1 required for each Remote site
Note: Registration of Host CPU and software required
DMR Site
Equipment Name
Remarks
PZ-M606-A
On board Ethernet Interface card
SPN-8IPLA IP PAD
8 Port PAD with built-in compression
PZ-24IPLA
24 Port PAD Expansion, mounts on SPN-8IPLA
Note: Registration “not” required
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 24
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Chapter 2 System Configuration
Module Configuration
The UNIVERGE NEAX® 2000 IPS consists of single or multiple Port Interface Modules (PIM)
depending on the system configuration, and there are two types of PIMs; “Physical” PIM and
“Virtual” PIM. The Physical PIM is “hardware” PIM which is used to accommodate an MP,
FPs, IP PADs, legacy LT cards, AP cards, and power supply units. One Physical PIM provides
up to 64 LT ports and up to 8 Physical PIMs can be accommodated in a Stand Alone system.
The Virtual PIM is a “software” PIM and provides up to 64 ports per PIM for use by system
programming as DtermIP telephones, Wireless PS stations or Peer to Peer (PTP) CCIS trunks.
The system consists of up to 16 PIMs, by the combination of Physical PIMs and Virtual PIMs,
thus providing 1020 ports. When the use of Virtual PIMs exceeds 8 then the number Physical
PIMs is reduced by one for each additional Virtual PIM required.
The illustration below shows examples of 1020-port configuration by the combination of TDM
LT ports, DtermIP telephones, Wireless PS stations and Peer to Peer (PTP) CCIS trunks.
Figure 2-1 System Configuration with DtermIP (1020-Port Configuration)
Example 1
Example 2
PIM #3 PIM #7
PIM #11 PIM #15
PIM #3 PIM #7
PIM #11 PIM #15
PIM #2 PIM #6
PIM #10 PIM #14
PIM #2 PIM #6
PIM #10 PIM #14
PIM #1 PIM #5
PIM #9 PIM #13
PIM #1 PIM #5
PIM #9 PIM #13
PIM #0 PIM #4
PIM #8 PIM #12
PIM #0 PIM #4
PIM #8 PIM #12
448 LT ports +
64 IP-PADs
252 DtermIPs +
128 Wireless +
128 PTP CCIS
192 LT ports +
64 IP-PADs
PIM
PIM
Physical PIM
Virtual PIM
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
508 DtermIPs +
128 Wireless +
128 PTP CCIS
Page 25
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The figure 2-2 shows another example of 1020-port configuration by combination of legacy LT
ports and DtermIP telephones.
PIM #3
PIM #2
PIM #1
PIM #0
PIM #7
PIM #6
PIM #5
PIM #4
PIM #3
PIM #2
PIM #1
PIM #0
PIM #7
PIM #6
PIM #5
PIM #4
PIM #3
PIM #2
PIM #1
PIM #0
PIM #7
PIM #6
PIM #5
PIM #4
PIM #3
PIM #2
PIM #1
PIM #0
PIM #7
PIM #6
PIM #5
PIM #4
64 LT ports
+ 952 Dterm IPs
128 LT ports
+ 888 Dterm IPs
192 LT ports
+ 824 Dterm IPs
256 LT ports
+760 Dterm IPs
PIM #3
PIM #2
PIM #1
PIM #0
PIM #3
PIM #2
PIM #1
PIM #0
PIM #3
PIM #2
PIM #1
PIM #0
PIM #3
PIM #2
PIM #1
PIM #0
PIM #7
PIM #6
PIM #5
PIM #4
PIM #7
PIM #6
PIM #5
PIM #4
320 LT ports
+ 696 Dterm IPs
384 LT ports
+ 632 Dterm IPs
PIM
PIM
Physical PIM
Virtual PIM
PIM #7
PIM #6
PIM #5
PIM #4
448 LT ports
+ 568 Dterm IPs
PIM #7
PIM #6
PIM #5
PIM #4
512 LT ports
+ 504 Dterm IPs
Figure 2-2 System Configuration with DtermIP (1020-Port Configuration)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 26
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Installation Methods
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides three installation methods as follows:
Floor Standing Installation
Wall Mounting Installation
19-inch Rack Mounting Installation
Floor Standing Installation
In Floor Standing Installation, the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is comprised of up to 8 Port
Interface Modules (PIMs).
PIM #0
BASE
(64 ports)
PIM #1
PIM #0
BASE
(128 ports)
PIM #2
PIM #1
PIM #0
BASE
(192 ports)
PIM #3
PIM #2
PIM #1
PIM #0 PIM #4
BASE
BASE
(320 ports)
PIM #3
PIM #2
PIM #1 PIM #5
PIM #0 PIM #4
BASE
BASE
(384 ports)
PIM #3
PIM #2 PIM #6
PIM #1 PIM #5
PIM #0 PIM #4
BASE
BASE
(448 ports)
PIM #3
PIM #2
PIM #1
PIM #0
BASE
(256 ports)
PIM #3 PIM #7
PIM #2 PIM #6
PIM #1 PIM #5
PIM #0 PIM #4
BASE
BASE
(512 ports)
Figure 2-2 System Configuration in Floor-standing Installation
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 27
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Wall-mounting Installation
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can be wall-mounted with single or multiple PIM
configurations (maximum of eight PIMs).
Figure 2-3 Wall-mounting Installation
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 28
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
19 inch Rack-mounting Installation
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can be mounted in the IEC-standard 19 inch rack up to four
PIMs. (IEC: International Electro-technical Commission)
Figure 2-4 19-inch Rack-mounting Installation
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 29
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Modules and Installation Hardware
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is comprised of up to 8 Port Interface Modules (PIMs).
Modules
(1) Port Interface Module (PIM)
A PIM provides 13 card slots for common control, Line/Trunk (LT), and Application Processor (AP)
cards. It also houses an AC/DC Power Supply, DC/DC Power Supply (for -48V), and batteries for
protection from short-term (about 30 min.) power interruption. Four champ connectors for
Line/Trunk (LTC 0 to 3) are located at the lower front side of the PIM. A PIM provides a maximum
of 12 card slots for Line/Trunk (LT) and Application Processor (AP) cards. At maximum
configuration, the system is comprised of 8 PIMs.
There are two types of PIM (PIMMJ and PIMMK) depending on the system type as follows.
Type of PIM
PIM MJ
PIM MK
Single MP System
Used for PIM 0-7
Not used
PIM MJ
PIM MJ
(PIM3)
(PIM7)
PIM MJ
PIM MJ
(PIM2)
(PIM6)
PIM MJ
PIM MJ
(PIM1)
(PIM5)
PIM MJ
PIM MJ
(PIM4)
(PIM0)
(Single MP System)
Dual MP System
Used for PIM 1-7
Used for PIM 0
PIM MJ
PIM MJ
(PIM3)
(PIM7)
PIM MJ
PIM MJ
(PIM2)
(PIM6)
PIM MJ
PIM MJ
(PIM1)
(PIM5)
PIM MK
PIM MJ
(PIM4)
(PIM0)
(Dual MP System)
Unit Configuration
(2) Battery Module (BATTMH)
The BATTMH is an optional module for installing optional long-term (about 3 hours) backup
batteries. The BATTMH is designed to accommodate batteries covering up to a 4-PIM system (2
BATTMHs support maximum system configuration). The BATTMH is available for Floor Standing
Installation. (When the system is Wall-mounting/19 inch Rack-mounting configuration, the
BATTMH cannot be installed with the PIM.)
Modules
Abbrev
Description
PIMMJ
SN1729 PIMMJ
PIMMK
SN1730 PIMMK
BATTMH
SN1731 BATTMH
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Remarks
Single MP System: PIM 0 - PIM 7
Dual MP System: PIM 1 – PIM 7
Single MP System: Not used
Dual MP System: PIM 0
1 per STACK, Max.2 per system
Page 30
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Installation Hardware
Base/Top Assembly
The Base/Top Assembly includes a Base Unit and a Top Cover for the PIM. One Base/Top
Assembly is required for each PIM stack. The Base Unit also serves as the AC power
distribution panel for up to a four PIM configuration.
Hanger Assembly
The Hanger Assembly is used for Wall-mounting Installation. One set of Hanger Assembly is
required for each PIM.
19 inch Bracket
The 19-inch Bracket is a set of hardware used for 19-inch Rack-mounting Installation. The 19INCH RACK BRACKET (A) is installed on both sides of the PIM. One set of 19 inch Bracket
(A) is required for each PIM. The 19-INCH RACK BRACKET (B) is installed at the BASE of
stack. One 19-INCH BRACKET (B) is required for each stack.
If the system is 2 PIM or more configurations with 19-INCH BRACKET (B), one set of 19INCH BRACKET (A) is also required for the topmost PIM.
Optional Brackets
The Mounting Bracket is used for Floor Standing Installation. Without Mounting Bracket, 1.1G
shockproof is provided for 1 to 3-module stack and 0.5G shockproof is provided for 4 or more
module stack. To enhance the shockproof capability to 1.1G, one set of Mounting Bracket is
required for each 4 or more module stack and attached to the topmost PIM.
The I/F Bracket is used for Floor Standing Installation to joint the neighboring topmost PIM in 6
PIM or more configurations. One set of I/F Bracket is required for multiple stacks.
The Base Tray Assembly is used for Floor Standing Installation for stationary equipment (UL
complied). One set of Base Tray Assembly is required for each stack.
Installation Hardware
Abbrev
Description
Top Cover
TOP COVER ASSEM
Base/Top ASSEM
SN1545 BASERE
Hanger Assem
HANGER ASSEM (UL)
Quantity
1/STACK
(BASE ASSEM is local supply)
1/STACK
Mounting Bracket
MOUNTING BRACKET
1/PIM (Wall-mounting Installation)
1/PIM
(19 inch Rack-mounting Installation)
1/STACK
(19 inch Rack-mounting Installation)
OPTION (1/STACK)
I/F Bracket
I/F BRACKET ASSEM
OPTION (1/SYSTEM)
Base Tray
BASE TRAY ASSEM
OPTION (1/STACK)
19 INCH RACK BRACKET (A)
19 inch Bracket
19 INCH RACK BRACKET (B)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 31
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY
AC/DC Power Supply
The AC/DC Power Card is mounted in the left side of each PIM. The AC/DC Power card
provides power to all circuit cards, which reside in the PIM. AC power requirements are as
follows:
Input Voltage: 90 to 132 Vrms or 180 to 264 Vrms (selectable by switch) 50/60 Hz
DC/DC Power Unit
The DC/DC Power Unit is mounted under the AC/DC Power Card and generates -48 V power for
the circuit cards that need such power.
Battery Backup
Internal Short-term option
For customers requiring battery backup, short-term and/or long-term options are available. Two
3.4AH batteries are required per PIM, and installed inside of each PIM. Backup time is approx.
30 minutes when PHS (Wireless PS) is not accommodated and approx. 10 minutes when PHS
(Wireless PS) is accommodated in the system.
External Long-term option
Two 24AH batteries are required per each 2 PIMs, and installed inside of Battery Module in a
stack basis. Backup time is approx. 3 hours when PHS (Wireless PS) is not accommodated and
approx. 2 hours when PHS (Wireless PS) is accommodated in the system. The batteries are
varied depending on the requested backup time. The battery shall be locally provided.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 32
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Circuit Cards
The circuit cards used for UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is divided into the following three types.
According to these card types, the mounting locations of card and port allocation of the Time
Division Switch are varied.
•
Common Control Cards
- Main Processor (MP)
- Firmware Processor (FP)
- Ethernet
- Power
•
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards
- IP PAD, Line Circuit (LC), Central Office Trunk (COT), Tie Line Trunk (LDT/ODT),
etc.
•
Application Processor (AP) Cards
- SMDR/PMS/CIS/Hotel Printer Interface (AP00)
- T1/E1 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 33
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
IPS System Conditions
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is an IP communication system that integrates voice terminals
through Peer-to-Peer connection to the IP network. The system is a hybrid system to
accommodate both IP multiline terminals (DtermIP) and the Legacy PBX’s terminals (Legacy
terminal). Line/Trunk cards and Application Processor cards can be mounted in the system to
provide the Legacy PBX features that use the Time Division Switch (TDSW).
Station-To-Station Connection
Station-to-Station connection is available on the LAN. For DtermIP-to-DtermIP
connection (Peer-to-Peer connection), the voice data is transmitted and received directly
between DtermIPs on the LAN. For DtermIP-to-Legacy terminal connection, the IPPAD card is required to transmit and receive the voice data. This card is used to control
and convert the voice data. The MP card manages control signals in both types of
connections.
Public Network/TIE Network Connection
The system can be connected with a Public Network or Tie Line Network. When the
DtermIP communicates with the DtermIP/Legacy terminal in the destination office via
Public Network or Tie Line Network, the IP-PAD card and the trunk card are required to
transmit and receive the voice data.
CCIS Connection
The system can be connected with the IP network by No. 7 Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) via the Virtual IPT, when the destination office is 2000 IPS or
2400 IPX. For DtermIP-to-DtermIP connection via CCIS (Peer-to-Peer connection), the
voice data is transmitted and received directly between DtermIPs via the IP network
(CCIS via IP). For DtermIP-to-Legacy terminal connection via CCIS, the IP-PAD card
is required to transmit and receive the voice data. This card is used to control and convert
the voice data. The MP card has a built-in Virtual IPT and the Virtual IPT manages
control signals in both types of connections.
H.323 Connection
The system can be connected with the IP network by ITU-T recommendation H.323
protocol. The system can be connected to the terminal and network equipment according
to H.323 protocol. For DtermIP-to-DtermIP connection via the IP network with H.323
protocol, the IPT card and IP-PAD card are required to transmit and receive the control
signal and voice data. For voice compression, the 4VCT card is required. For Legacy
terminal connection via the IP network with H.323 protocol, the IPT card is required. For
voice compression, the 4VCT card is required.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 34
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Overall System Conditions
• To connect the MP (PN-CP24-D, PN-CP27-B, and PN-CP31-D) card to the LAN,
ETHER (PZ-M606-A) card is required on the MP card. PZ-M697 (ETHER) card is
mounted on the PN-CP31-E (MP) card.
One Virtual FP/AP card provides 64 ports to connect the Line/Trunk cards.
• The DTMF sender signal width of Dterm/DtermIP is 112-128 ms.
•
Dterm IP
• For the DtermIP, an AC-DC adapter or inline power patch panel is required.
• The hold tone for DtermIP is only “Minuet”. The hold tone set by CM48 Y=3 are not
effective for DtermIP.
Peer-to-Peer Connection
• For the communication between DtermIPs, the voice data is transmitted and received
directly, without converting voice packets into PCM and voice compression in the
system.
DRS=Device Registration Server
• The System-based DRS executes DtermIP registration.
•
The Network-based DRS is not available for the DtermIP registration.
Public Network/TIE Line Network Connection
• For the DtermIP communication between offices, the IP-PAD card is required.
•
Peer-to-Peer connection is not available in this connection.
H.323 Connection
• When connecting to the IP network with H.323 protocol, the IPT card and 4VCT
card are required.
When connecting DtermIP to the IP network with H.323 protocol, the IP-PAD card is
required.
• Peer-to-Peer connection between offices is not available.
• Connection via the Intranet is only supported.
•
For Voice over IP (H.323), a H.323 Gatekeeper is required for converting between IP
address and station number.
• The IP trunk provides only Point-to-Point connection.
•
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 35
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
CCIS Connection
• Peer-to-Peer connection between DtermIPs via CCIS is available only when the
destination office is 2000 IPS or 2400 IPX.
• The Virtual IPT can be connected to a maximum of 127 trunks.
• The Virtual IPT provides only Point-to-Multipoint connection.
• When a call over Peer-to-Peer connection via CCIS is put on hold and then answered
at the same station, Elapsed Time Display returns to 0:00:00.
When the destination office uses the physical IPT card, for example, when
connecting to the former PBX system, the IPT card and 4VCT card are required in
both offices.
• Conditions for Link Down Notice for CCIS connection are shown below.
- Link Down Notice is available only for Dterm and DtermIP accommodated in the
2000 IPS and IPSDML/IPSDMR. This is not available for a single line telephone and
Attendant Console.
- For message display, Dterm/DtermIP with 24-digit or more LCD is
recommended. 16-digit LCD may not display all messages properly.
•
- Notification message can be displayed regardless of idle or busy state of
Dterm/DtermIP, writing the message over the present display. After six seconds,
the display returns to the time display automatically.
- The system detects a Link Down on the condition that TCP connection between
offices is interrupted. The Link Down is notified to the Dterm/DtermIP at 15-20
seconds later from the system detects the Link Down.
- Link Down Notice is available only for the CCIS connection via Virtual IPT.
CCIS connection with CCT/DTI card or LDT/ODT card is not available.
- When the link between offices connected by CCIS via Virtual IPT is interrupted,
the lamp of Dterm/DtermIP button becomes the state as shown below. Then press
the button, the LCD of the Dterm/DtermIP displays the following.
COLOR AND STATE
OF BUTTON
Red/Flashing
0.125 seconds ON(Momentarily)
0.125 seconds OFF
Red/Flashing
0.5 seconds ON(Slowly)
0.5 seconds OFF
OFF
OFF
-
STATE AND
OPERATION
Link Down occurrence
Press the button after
Link Down occurrence
Link restoration
Press the button after
Link restoration
LCD DISPLAY
Link Down to CCIS
Normal Condition:
CCIS
- When the link between offices recovers, the flashing lamp of the button goes out.
CCIS and H.323 Connection
• The service features requiring continuous voice transmission such as Background
Music should not be used because the traffic may reduce overall performance of the
LAN.
• In the voice communication via the Internet, the connection and communication
delay may occur and the voice quality may deteriorate.
• The Virtual IPT and IPT card does not support Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
(DHCP) service.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 36
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
IP-PAD
• The PN-8IPLA IP-PAD is required for the following connections.
-
DtermIP-to-Legacy terminal connection
DtermIP-to-Public Network/Tie Line Network connection
External hold tone connection
Conference Trunk (CFT) connection
Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT) connection
•
The PZ-24IPLA (24DSP) card is mounted on the PN-8IPLA (IP-PAD) card when
more than 8 IP PADs (16/24/32) are required.
•
FAX Communication with IP PAD cards.
PN-8IPLA IP-PAD-C supports G.711 and G.726 Pass-Through FAX
communication
- When providing the G.711 pass-through FAX communication with the PN32IPLA-A card, following condition is required.
-
PN-32IPLA IP PAD-E is mounted.
OR
PN-32IPLA IP PAD-D and PN-16VCTAA IP PAD-B are mounted.
(When mounting two 16VCT cards, both should be PN-16VCTAA IP
PAD-B.)
When providing the G.726 pass-through FAX communication with the PN32IPLA-A card, following condition is required.
PN-32IPLA IP PAD-E and the PN-16VCTAA IP PAD-B are mounted.
(When mounting two 16VCT cards, both should be PN-16VCTAA IP
PAD-B.)
- 8IPLA does not support T.30 FAX. (T.30 FAX requires the 32IPLA-A)
- When providing the T.30 FAX communication the PN-32IPLA-A IP PAD-D/E
card and the PN-16VCTAA IP PAD-B are required.
-
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 37
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
UNIVERGE NEAX® IPSDML System Configuration
The UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML consists of from one to eight MODULAR CHASSIS depending
on the system configuration. There are 2 types of MODULAR CHASSIS; "Physical Modular
Chassis" and "Virtual Modular Chassis ".
The Physical Modular Chassis is “hardware Modular Chassis” and is used to accommodate an
MP, FPs, IP PADs, legacy LT/AP cards, and power supply units. The Physical Modular Chassis
provides 56 LT ports in hardware slots and provides 8 ports in software port allocation (56 LT
ports and 8 virtual ports). One Modular Chassis provides 8 card slots including one card slot for
Main Processor (MP) and other 7 slots for Line Trunk (LT)/Application Processor (AP) cards; 56
LT ports and 8 virtual LT ports; AC, LTC, BUS cable connectors and power switch which are
located at the rear side of Modular Chassis. The Physical Modular Chassis can be installed on
the desktop or into the 19-inch rack only.
The Virtual Modular Chassis is a “software Modular Chassis” with a port capacity of 64 ports.
The Virtual MC is a “software” MC and is used to accommodate IP telephones by system data
programming. The port capacity of the Virtual MC is different depends on the number of
Physical MC.
The port allocation varies with the version of system.
Software Port Allocation for Each Physical MC Configuration
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 38
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 39
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 40
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
UNIVERGE NEAX® IPSDMR System Configuration
The UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDMR consists of from one to two MODULAR CHASSIS depending
on the system configuration. There are 2 types of MODULAR CHASSIS; "Physical Modular
Chassis" and "Virtual Modular Chassis ".
The Physical Modular Chassis is “hardware Modular Chassis” and is used to accommodate an
MP, FPs, IP PADs, legacy LT/AP cards, and power supply units. The Physical Modular Chassis
provides 56 LT ports in hardware slots and provides 8 ports in software port allocation (56 LT
ports and 8 virtual ports). One Modular Chassis provides 8 card slots including one card slot for
Main Processor (MP) and other 7 slots for Line Trunk (LT)/Application Processor (AP) cards; 56
LT ports and 8 virtual LT ports; AC, LTC, BUS cable connectors and power switch which are
located at the rear side of Modular Chassis. The Physical Modular Chassis can be installed on
the desktop or into the 19-inch rack only.
The Virtual Modular Chassis is a “software Modular Chassis” with a port capacity of 64 ports. A
maximum of two Virtual Modular Chassis can be assigned per IPSDMR for a total of 128 ports
used to accommodate IP stations by system data programming.
The UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDMR locates the maximum of 64 FP/AP cards per system, at multiple
Remote Sites. The number of FP/AP cards accommodated at one Remote Site should be a
maximum of eight including the MP built-in FP. If more than eight FP/APs are assigned, the
system does not operate normally. The maximum number of Remote Sites is 30. The MP card at
Remote Site has the same system data as that at Main Site, because Remote Site automatically
gets the data from Main Site at the time of setup. In normal operation, Main Site automatically
copies the system data to Remote Site through the network once a day. Because the CP31-D is a
cost down CPU, the following options that are built-in on the CP24 are not available with the
CP31:
•
•
•
•
No built-in DAT.
Only one RS Port.
No built-in DK (external/relay key).
No MN Alarm Indication
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 41
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
The following illustration shows Modular Chassis hardware configurations, software port
allocation, face layout and rear view of Modular Chassis for The UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDMR.
IPSDMR MODULAR CHASSIS Hardware Configuration
1 MODULAR CHASSIS
2 MODULAR CHASSIS
Virtual MODULAR
CHASSIS
(128 IP Ports)
Virtual MODULAR
CHASSIS
(128 IP Ports)
MC-0
56
LT ports
8 Virtual
LT ports
MC-1
56
LT ports
8 Virtual
LT ports
MC-0
56
LT ports
8 Virtual
LT ports
256 AP Ports/system
256 AP Ports/system
MODULAR CHASSIS Software Port Allocation
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 42
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Remote PIM over IP System Outline
When IPSDMR and 2000 IPS PIM are installed at Remote Site, and connected to a Main Site over
IP network, the Main Site system controls and maintains the operation of Remote Sites as one
single system. If a communication failure occurs between the Main Site and Remote Site, the
Remote Site automatically changes over to a survival mode and operates as a stand-alone system.
IPSDMR: IPS Distributed Model Remote (with PN-CP31-D)
IPS PIM: IPS (with PN-CP24-D)
Outline of System Operation
• The MP card of Main Site controls call processing, and Remote Site follows the Main
Site in normal operation mode.
Remote Site can accommodate analog Single Line telephones, Dterm, PS, DtermIP,
and LT/AP cards.
• Local Switch (TDSW) at Remote Site connects an outside party when the Remote
Site is directly connected to the PSTN/GSTN.
•
In the case of connections between Main Site and Remote Site, or Remote Site and
Remote Site, the voice path is connected via Peer-to-Peer or IP-PAD.
• If the communications between Main Site and Remote Site are interrupted, the
Remote Site starts a survival mode operation after the system reset.
•
Outline of Survival Mode Operation
• Remote Site system watches a Keep Alive signal sent from Main Site regularly.
• If a line failure occurs (Keep Alive signal is not received), Remote Site resets the
own system and starts survival mode operation as a stand-alone system to control the
call processing within the Remote Site.
•
During survival mode operation, Remote Site system checks regularly whether the
communications with Main Site is possible or not. When the Remote Site regards that
the communications are possible, the Remote Site will change over to the normal
mode to communicate with the Main Site automatically or manually.
Outline of Survival Mode Operation
• This feature displays the link state between Main Site and Remote Site on the
designated Dterm or DtermIP at both sites, and allows users at both sites to notice the
link failure.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 43
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Remote PIM over IP System Conditions
General Conditions
• The same version of software must be installed in the MP cards of Main and Remote
Sites.
• The way of loading and conditions of Key CD are following.
– The same number of Key CD for remote site license as the number of remote
sites is required for Remote PIM over IP system. The required Key CD for the
whole system must be loaded to the Main Site.
– Total number of terminals that can be accommodated in the Remote Site depends
on the number of port and number of license allocated from total Key CD data of
Main Site. The total Key CD data is loaded to Main Site and divided between
Main Site and Remote Sites as following examples.
Example 1: When 256-port Key CD is loaded to the Main Site and 64 ports are
used in the Remote Site. Remote Site: 64 ports are allocated from the Main
Site. Main Site: 192 ports are available
Example 2: When 128-IP license Key CD is loaded to the Main Site. The
license is allocated in order of connecting IP telephone regardless of Main Site
or Remote Site.
– After Key CD data is loaded to the Main Site, the service feature, number of port,
and number of license to be used by each Remote Site are sent to the flash
memory of each Remote Site’s MP card automatically. When Remote Sites
operate with survival mode, this data is used.
– Data to be used by each Remote Site is stored in the flash memory every 10
minutes. When a Remote Site starts operating with survival mode within 10
minutes from starting up, the system does not operate normally because the data
is not stored in flash memory. The system should be observed for more than 10
minutes after starting up.
– The number of legacy terminal that depends on the number of PIM in TDSW
system depends on the number of port in Remote PIM over IP system. For Key
CD data, one PIM license for TDSW system is converted to 64 ports for Remote
PIM over IP system.
The number of accommodated terminals/trunks in Main Site and Remote Site should
be a maximum of 1020 ports in the whole system.
• The TCP/IP network is required between Main Site and Remote Site. The closed and
bandwidth guaranteed network is preferable, such as IP-VPN (Layer 3 VPN) or wide
area Ethernet service (Layer 2 VPN). The following table shows the permissible
delay time in the network.
•
Recommended/
Maximum Value
Recommended
Maximum Value
Permissible delay time
One-way
Return-way
100 ms.
200 ms.
120 ms.
240 ms.
If the network is short of the requirement, it may cause the delay operation of system,
the delay and deterioration of voice packets, disconnection of calls, and frequent
changeover to survival mode at Remote Site.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 44
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
•
This feature is available in the Retrofit System (used as Main Site). The system that
using the following MP cards can be mixed used in Remote PIM over IP system in
any combination.
Main Site: PN-CP24-D, PN-CP27-B, PN-CP31E, PN-CP26-B, PN-CP28-B
Remote Site: PN-CP31-D, PN-CP24-D, PN-CP26-B
NOTE: PN-CP27-B/PN-CP28-B cannot be used as Backup CPU system in Remote Site.
•
This feature is not compatible with Fusion service of 2400 IPX.
Conditions for System Configuration
• The number of Remote Sites is a maximum of 30.
The total number of FP/AP at Main Site and all Remote Sites should not exceed 64
including the MP built-in FP, Virtual FP, and Virtual IPT.
• The number of FP/AP accommodated at one Remote Site should be a maximum of
eight including the MP built-in FP.
•
•
Remote Site can accommodate the following FP/AP/LT cards.
- FP: One MP built-in FP and two Virtual FP
- AP: BRT, 24DTI, 24PRT (ISDN-PRI)
- LT: 8IPLA, DLC, LC, COT, ODT
NOTE: Attendant Console, Desk Console, Add-On Module, are not mountable at Remote
Site.
•
Remote Site cannot accommodate the following FP/AP/LT cards.
- FP: FP card (CP15) is not mountable at Remote Site.
- AP: AP00 (SMDR), AP00 (DBM), ICH, CCH, DCH (Q-SIG/Q931a), 4RSTB
(MFC/T1-ANI/E911), CFTC (32-party conference), IPT
- LT: 8RSTG (PBR), ILC (ISDN Terminal), 4RSTF (Caller ID station), PN8LCAD (LLC), PN-4LLCB (LLC), PN-8PFTB (PFT), 4VCT, DK00, DAT
NOTE: Four-line built-in PBR on the MP card is available at Remote Site.
•
•
•
•
•
MP built-in FP must be set to each Remote Site.
The port for FP card/MP built-in FP must be assigned with every 8 port. If the
assignment value cannot be divided by 8, the value that the remainder is omitted is
assigned to the FP card/MP built-in FP automatically.
The available IP-PAD card in the Remote Site is PN-8IPLA.
For the system capacity of ISDN system or CCIS system, refer to the system capacity
of each system manual. Set the whole Remote PIM over IP system within the system
capacity and be sure to mount the handler card in the Site where the interface card is
installed.
The number of ports accommodated at one Remote Site should be a maximum of
256. This is the sum of maximum 128 physical ports (one built-in FP), maximum
128 IP ports (two Virtual FP), and AP ports such as ISDN, etc.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 45
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Conditions for Survival Mode at Remote Site
• Remote Site starts survival mode operation in the following cases.
- When the communications (Keep Alive signal) in every 30 seconds between
Main Site and Remote Site are interrupted for the predetermined time set by
CM0B Y=31-60>50 on normal mode operation.
- When Remote Site cannot be connected to Main Site or is not allowed connecting
to Main Site after the system reset of the Remote Site.
Remote Site is reset automatically to change the operation from normal mode to
survival mode when it detects an interruption of the communications from/to Main
Site.
• When Remote Site starts the survival mode operation, the fault information “Initialize
by CAT or MAT” is registered to the MP card of Remote Site. In addition,
“Communication error occurrence between Main Site and Remote Site” is registered
to the MP card of Main Site at 20 seconds later from the predetermined time set by
CM0B Y=31-60>50.
• Remote Site on survival mode checks at every 30 seconds if the communications to
Main Site are possible. When the Remote Site regards that the communications are
possible, “Communication error restoration between Main Site and Remote Site” is
registered to the MP card of Main Site at 20 seconds later from the predetermined
time set by CM0B Y=31-60>51.
• When Remote Site on survival mode regards that the communications to Main Site
are possible, manual changeover (system reset) is required. Automatic changeover
(re-connection to Main Site) is also selectable in system data programming. At the
automatic changeover, Remote Site system is initialized and the calls on going are
disconnected due to the reset of terminals.
•
Service Conditions
• Set the unique location number to each location group for proper setting of the IPPAD channel selection and CODEC for voice compression.
• The system clock at Remote Site synchronizes with the system clock at Main Site. If
the communications to Main Site are interrupted, Remote Site does not synchronize
and operates at the hardware clock on the MP card of Remote Site.
• Remote Site cannot accommodate the Virtual IPT and the IPT card (H.323).
The service features requiring continuous voice transmission such as Background
Music and Internal Zone Paging should not be used at Remote Site considering the
traffic on the network.
• Multiple line service should not be used among different sites considering the traffic
on the network.
•
Automated Attendant should not be used at Remote Site considering the traffic.
• Unavailable services at Remote Site are as follows.
•
- Attendant Console, Desk Console, Add-On Module, and ISDN Terminal are not
mountable.
- Caller ID - Station is not available.
- CCIS is not available.
- All services using MP built-in DK or DK card are not available.
- MP built-in DAT and Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT) card are not available.
- RS Port No.1 is not available with CP31-D.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 46
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
•
Set the unique trunk route to each Site.
Different numbering plan for every site must not be assigned.
• Since Main Site controls OAI, OAI terminals cannot be used at Remote Site during
survival mode operation.
• Each Remote Site must provide a hold tone to the station at the Remote Site.
•
- External hold tone (using Jack on the MP card): Tone source is required for each
site.
- Internal hold tone: Available
- Hold tone using DAT: Not available
•
The maximum station number which can be used in SMDR or PMS Interface is as
follows.
- MP built-in SMDR/PMS on IP: 1020 stations
- SMDR/PMS with AP00 on RS-232C: 504 stations
•
You can connect MAT to Remote Site via RS-232C or LAN.
SNMP is not available at Remote Site.
• The IP Remote Site does not have DHCP server and client function.
• The MJ/MN alarm indications are not available at Remote Site. If a fault occurs at
Remote Site, the fault is notified to the Main Site and MJ/MN alarm is indicated at
the Main Site.
•
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 47
CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Conditions for Link Down Notice
• Link Down Notice is available only for Dterm and DtermIP accommodated in Main Site
and Remote Site. This is not available for a single line telephone and Attendant Console.
• For message display, Dterm/DtermIP with 24-digit or more LCD is recommended. 16digit LCD may not display all messages properly.
• Notification message can be displayed regardless of idle or busy state of Dterm/DtermIP,
writing the message over the present display. After six seconds, the display returns to the
time display automatically.
• The system detects a Link Down on the condition that UDP connection between Main
Site and Remote Site is interrupted. The Link Down is notified to the Dterm/DtermIP at
20-50 seconds (time programmable).
• When the link between Main Site and Remote Site is interrupted, the lamp of
Dterm/DtermIP button becomes the state as shown below. Then press the button, the LCD
of the Dterm/DtermIP displays the following.
COLOR AND STATE
OF BUTTON
Red/Flashing
0.125 seconds ON(Momentarily)
0.125 seconds OFF
Red/Flashing
0.5 seconds ON(Slowly)
0.5 seconds OFF
Green/Flashing 0.125 seconds ON(Intermittently)
0.125 seconds OFF0.125 seconds ON0.625 seconds OFF
Green/Flashing 0.125 seconds ON(Intermittently)
0.125 seconds OFF0.125 seconds ON0.625 seconds OFF
OFF
OFF
•
-
STATE AND
OPERATION
Link Down occurrence
LCD DISPLAY
-
Press the button after
Link Down occurrence
Remote Site is survival
mode after Link
restoration
Link Down to Site xx
(xx: Site No.)
-
Press the button with
Remote Site is survival
mode after Link
restoration
Remote PIM is normal
mode after Link
restoration
Press the button with
Remote Site is normal
mode after Link
restoration
Link Down to Site xx
(xx: Site No.)
Normal Condition:
R-PIM
Link restoration is notified to the Dterm/DtermIP at 20-50 seconds. If the time is not
set by programming, the Link restoration is notified to the Dterm/DtermIP at 110-150
seconds later from the system detects the Link Ready. After the link is ready, the
lamp of Dterm/DtermIP button keeps flashing during the Remote Site operates on
survival mode. Since the color of lamp and the indication interval changes, an
administrator at the Remote Office can changeover the system operation from
survival mode to normal remote mode according to this indication. When the link
between Main Site and Remote Site recovers and the Remote Site starts subordinate
operation to the Main Site (normal mode), the flashing lamp of the button goes out.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 48
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Chapter 3 Terminals
A variety of terminal equipment may be connected to the UNIVERGE
following equipment may be installed with the system.
NEAX
2000 IPS. The
SN716 DESK CON (Attendant Console)
Dterm Series i Analog Terminals
Single-Line Analog
Hospitality Single-Line Analog
Dterm Series i (IP) Terminals
4-Line display DtermIP
8-Line display DtermIP
16-Line display DtermIP
16LD display DtermIP
32-Line display DtermIP
Dterm Series i (TDM) Digital Terminals
2-Line Digital
4-Line display Digital
8-Line non-display Digital
8-Line display Digital
16-Line display Digital
16LD display Digital
32-Line display Digital
60 Console Add-On Module/DSS/BLF
16LD Desi-Less ADM
Dterm Series E (TDM) Digital Terminals
2-Line Digital
8-Line non-display Digital
8-Line display Digital
16-Line display Digital
32-Line display Digital
60 Console Add-On Module/DSS/BLF
Dterm Cordless Terminals
Dterm Cordless II
Dterm Cordless Lite II
Dterm Headset Cordless II
Plantronics CT Cordless
PS - Wireless Handset
Dterm SP30 (IP Soft Phone)
INASET
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 49
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
SN716 Desk Con
The SN716 Desk Console has an ergonomic design and provides full access to all PBX Console
features. It connects to the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS using the same circuit cards as the Dterm
Series i/E terminals. The SN716 Desk Console operates on a switched-loop basis with a
maximum of 6 Attendant loops terminating at each console on the associated Interface card. The
Attendant uses these loops for answering, originating, holding, extending, and reentering calls.
When Attendant loop release is used, the number of loops is effectively increased to a maximum
of 12 for each console. The SN716 Desk Console also provides flexible key assignments to meet
the operator's needs. Key assignments are semi-fixed by system default data, but may be
changed via programming.
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS supports a maximum of eight SN716 DESK Consoles.
SN716 DESKCON Features
•
Character LCD (4x40 characters)
•
•
•
•
LCD designation strips
Software-controlled LCD loop key
Full access to PBX features
Headset connectivity
•
Recorder connectivity
Dimensions: 10 inches (25.4 cm wide x 9 inches (22.9 cm) deep x 4 inches (10.2 cm) high
Line Conditions of the SN716 DESKCON
The cable length between the DLC card and terminal varies depending on the type of terminal.
The table shows the line conditions of the Attendant Console.
Line Conditions of the SN716 DESKCON
Interface Cards Type
PN-8DLCL/8DLCP
PN-4DLCM/4DLCQ
Power Options
PN-PW00
AC Adapter
Cable Length* (Cable 0.5/24 AWG)
1000 ft. (304 m)
PN-PW00
1000 ft. (304 m)
AC Adapter
4000 ft. (1200 m)
*Cable length is based on the diameter of the cable and the terminal impedance.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 50
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
SN716 DESKCON Exclusive Features
While the DESKSON has full access to PBX features the SN716 DESKCON has the following
exclusive features.
DESKCON Exclusive Features
Call Waiting Display
Attendant Assisted Calling
Attendant Camp-on
(Full and Semi-automatic)
Attendant Called/Calling Name Display
Attendant Called/Calling Number
Attendant Call Selection
Attendant Console Lockout-Password
Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup and Cancel
Attendant Interposition Calling/Transfer
Attendant Lamp Check
Attendant Listed Directory Number
Attendant Loop Release
Attendant Programming
Attendant Training Jacks
Audible Indication Control
Call Processing Indication
Call Queuing
Call Splitting
Common Route Indial
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
Incoming Call Identification
Individual Trunk Access
Multi-Function Key
Multiple Console Operation
Pushbutton Calling - Attendant Only
Serial Call
Time Display
Trunk Group Busy Display
Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer By
Attendant
Attendant Delay Announcement
Attendant Lockout
Attendant Overflow
Attendant Override
Note: For Detail of each feature refer to Chapter 9 Feature Description.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 51
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Functions and use of Keys and Lamp Indications
LOCATION
NUMBER
KEY OR LAMP
DESIGNATION
FULL
NAME
BASIC
/OPTION
KEY
/LAMP
1
L1-L6
Loop
Basic
Key
2
L1A-L6A
Loop Lamp
A
Basic
Lamp
(one per
loop)
3
L1B-L6B
Loop Lamp
B
Basic
Lamp
(one per
loop)
4
Push-button
Dial
Pushbutton Dial
Basic
Key
5
SRC
Source
Basic
Key &
Lamp
6
DEST
Destination
Basic
Key &
Lamp
7
Talk
Talk
Basic
Key
8
Cancel
Cancel
Basic
Key
9
Hold
Hold
Basic
Key
10
Release
Release
Basic
Key
11
Answer
Answer
Basic
Key &
Lamp
12
Start
Start
Basic
Key &
Lamp
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
FUNCTION
The attendant answers the call
associated to the particular loops. Loop
keys are usually used to reenter to held
calls, answer automatic recalls.
Steady green lamp indicates attendant
connected to the loop, or called station
has answered. Flashing green lamp
indicates call waiting to be answered.
Steady red lamp indicates call party
busy. Flashing red lamp indicates call
held at the console.
Flashing red lamp indicates automatic
recall has been activated.
Allows the attendant to:
• Process incoming calls
• Originate calls
• Activate various service features
Allows the attendant to speak with the
calling party. The associated lamp lights
when the attendant is connected. The
source trunk/station number will be
shown in the number display field.
Allows the attendant to speak with the
called party. The associated lamp lights
when the attendant is connected. The
destination station/trunk number will be
shown in the number display field.
Allows the attendant to join in a threeway conference with the calling and
called parties. When connection is
established, both SRC and DEST lamps
will light.
Allows the attendant to:
• Disconnect the calling (source) or
called party (destination) from the
loop.
• Disconnect an outgoing trunk or
tone seized by the attendant.
• Disconnect the station recalling
attendant for transfer assistance.
Allows the attendant to hold a call at the
console and/or to activate it to serial call
state.
Allows the attendant to release from an
established connection freeing the
console for processing of new calls.
Allows the attendant to answer
incoming calls in the order in which they
arrive at the console.
Allows the attendant to extend an
outgoing call to a station. Completion of
outgoing pulse will be recognized.
Page 52
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Functions and use of Keys and Lamp Indications (Cont.)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Incoming Call Identification: These eight non-locking keys with associated lamps provide attendant access
to specific types of incoming calls. A flashing lamp indicates a call waiting to be answered. A steady lamp
indicates a call answered. The standard arrangement of these keys is shown on the face layout.
Listed Directory
Basic
Key & Lamp
Incoming central office trunk call.
LDN
Number
Allows the attendant to answer incoming Tie
Line calls when the distant station dials access
TIE
Tie Line
Basic
Key & Lamp
digit to the attendant.
Call ForwardingAllows the attendant to answer incoming calls
Busy
Basic
Key & Lamp
Busy Line
to specified station when the station is busy.
ATND
Attendant
Basic
Key & Lamp
Incoming station call.
Allows the attendant to answer incoming calls
Call ForwardingNANS
Basic
Key & Lamp
to specified station when the station does not
Don’t Answer
answer within the predetermined time.
Incoming station call for attendant assistance
in transferring an established outside call to
Recall
Recall
Basic
Key & Lamp
another station.
Additional incoming special service calls, such
Option
Optional
Option
Key & Lamp
as FX.
Additional incoming special service calls, such
Option
Optional
Option
Key & Lamp
as FX.
Allows the attendant to connect with pager.
PAGE
Page
Basic
Key & Lamp
(overhead paging)
REC
Record
Basic
Key & Lamp
Allows the attendant to connect with recorder.
Allows the attendant to answer incoming calls
EMG
Emergency
Basic
Key & Lamp
from the station where the station leaves the
receiver off.
Busy
Allows the attendant to enter into station-toBV
Basic
Key & Lamp
Verification
station connection.
Allows the attendant to individually select a
Trunk
Basic
Key & Lamp
TRKSL
desired trunk.
Selection
Allows the attendant to establish incoming call
to Call Park.
Note: The attendant can connect this call once
Call Park
Call Park
Basic
Key & Lamp
again by dialing a specific number and
individual number of the console from an
ordinary extension telephone.
Allows the attendant to be automatically
recalled when the station user replaces the
Serial call
SC
Basic
Key & Lamp
handset, by depressing the key after extending
Set
a central office incoming call to the station
user.
Allows the attendant to supervise a call by
Supervisory
SVC
Basic
Key & Lamp
depressing the key after extending a central
Call Set
office incoming call to the station user.
Allows the attendant access to various optional
features provided as required. Each key has an
Option
Optional
Option
Key & Lamp
associated lamp.
Allows the attendant to cut off the voice
Mute
Mute
Basic
Key & Lamp
transmission.
Steady lamp indicates trouble conditions in the
Alarm
Alarm
Basic
Key
PBX.
When the attendant position (console) is
Position
Position
Basic
Lamp
available to process calls, the lamp lights.
Available
Available
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 53
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Functions and use of Keys and Lamp Indications (Cont.)
26
Position
Busy
Position Busy
Basic
Key &
Lamp
27
Night
Night
Basic
Key &
Lamp
28
Up Down
Up and Down
Basic
Key
29
LCD
Liquid Crystal
Display
Basic
Display
30
MultiFunction Key
MultiFunction Key
Basic
Display
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
When the key is pressed, the lamp will light, and
the console will become not available.
Note: Press the button if operators leave their
seats.
Allows the console to place in the night answer
mode and lights the associated lamp. Releasing
the key restores the console to normal operation.
Allows the attendant to adjust volume of the
receiver, ringer and contrast of the LCD.
The following information will be displayed:
1st line:
The kind of party that connects to the attendant,
the number of the waiting calls, the date and time.
2nd line:
Tenant number, station class of service and station
number belonging to the destination (called) party.
3rd Line:
Tenant number, station class of service and station
number belonging to the source (calling) party.
4th Line:
Optional indication, such as trunk busy.
Keys while idle:
Mode—allows access to DAY/NIGHT mode
and LKOUT (Console Lock out mode)
Prog—allows access for programming DISA,
System Speed Dial, Date & Time and Tone
Ringer
Keys while answering or originating:
SPB—Out Pulse Short
LPB—Out Pulse Long
SHF—Flash Over Trunk
Keys while calling a busy station:
B.V—Busy Verification
Keys while calling a DND station:
DDOVR—DND override
Keys while accessing Hotel feature:
RC—Room Cut off
MW—Message Waiting
DD—Do not Disturb
WU—Wake up call
RESET—Reset
Page 54
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Dterm Series i Analog Terminals
The Dterm Series i is available in two distinct analog models.
Single-Line
Hospitality Single-Line
Low End Single-Line
Descriptions of the Analog Terminals
DTR-1 (WH) TEL
DTR-1 (BK) TEL
DTR-1HM (WH) TEL
DTR-1HM (BK) TEL
DTH-1-1 (BK) TEL
Fully modular with Redial key, Flash key, Message Waiting
lamp, Data Jack and Ring/Handset Receive Volume.
Fully modular with Redial key, Flash key, Message Waiting
Lamp, Data Jack, eight programmable Feature/Speed Dial
keys and Ring/Handset Receive Volume.
Fully modular with Built-in Wall Mount Unit, Flash Key, Mute
Key, Handset Cord, Message Waiting, Redial Key, three
different Ring Tones, Volume Control
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 55
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Line Conditions of the Analog Terminals
Terminal
Type
Card Type
PN-8LCAK
(max. 600 ohms loop resistance)
PN-AUCA
(max. 2500 ohms loop resistance)
PN-4LLCB
(max. 2500 ohms loop resistance)
PN-8LCAD
(max. 600 ohms loop resistance)
DTR-1
DTR-1HM
DTH-1-1
Cable Length*
(Cable 0.5/24 AWG)
Approximately:
1.43km (.88 miles)
Approximately
12.29km (7.63 miles)
Approximately
12.29km (7.63 miles)
Approximately:
1.43km (.88 miles)
*Cable length is based on the diameter of the cable and the terminal impedance.
Specification for Analog Terminals
Item
Size
Color
Dial Pad
Type of Dial
Function Buttons
Message Waiting Lamp
Operating Voltage
Speed Dials
Hookflash Timer
Redial Key
Ring Vol. Control
Ring Tone Pitch Control
Handset Receiver &
Speaker Volume
Handset
Handset Cord
Directory Card
Data Jack
Wall-Mount Unit
Electrostatic Discharge
Approvals
Description
224mm x 165mm +/5mm (Length x Width)
Black or White
12-Key Dial Pad: 4 Rows and 3 Columns;
Metropolitan Dial Pad with Alphabet, * and # buttons;
Button 5 has a Raised Dot
DTMF and Dial Pulse
Hook flash, Redial Key on DTR-1-1; Hookflash,
Program, Redial, Monitor, and Hold Keys on DTR1HM-1
Neon Lamp with Window Design -Glow Through Filter
Raised from Surface with MW and Incoming Ring
Indication
Activation Voltage 88V to 108V, Deactivation
Voltage 53V or Less
(DTR-1HM Only) 8 Buttons, Maximum 21 Digits
630+/10ms (Fixed)
Maximum of 31 digits
3 Levels (Soft, Medium, Loud) Programmable
3 Levels (Slow, Medium, Fast, Off) Programmable
6 Levels (Volume Key)
Hearing Aid Compatible, Dynamic Type Element
12 feet
Large Convenient Directory Card
Dedicated Jack; Used for Connection to Modem,
Speakerphone, etc., located on back of telephone
Built-in
Can Withstand +/- 20kv Discharge
c-UL (Ul 60950 3rd Edition) FCC part 15, 68,
IC (Industry Canada)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 56
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Dterm Series i (IP) Terminals
The DtermIP gives you the freedom to tailor your platform and telephony applications for your
business even as the business grows and your needs expand. With its advanced digital circuitry,
the DtermIP consists of several distinct models to meet users' diverse telephone terminal needs.
DtermIP terminals are designed to provide ergonomic form and user-friendly functions.
DtermIP terminals offer an adjustable LCD display unit with menu-driven soft key operation,
allowing users to program terminals at the desktop. The LCD panels are equipped with three
lines of display, each with 245 characters. Standard features include headset jacks, wall mounts
and adjustable base units.
DtermIPs has four soft keys located just under the display of each terminal. These menu-driven
soft keys allow user’s convenient access too many telephony features. According to the status of
the multi-line terminal, functions of the soft keys are displayed in the third line on the LCD. If
the status of the terminal changes, the soft keys displayed will change automatically.
Dedicated function keys provide easy one-touch access to the most common telephone
operations. These keys include: feature, recall conference, redial, hold, transfer, answer,
speaker, microphone, directory and message.
DtermIP terminals are ideal choices for users that are connected through a managed IP network.
DtermIP terminals are class B devices and comply with U.S. FCC regulations for office and
residential use as well as the Canadian Inference-causing Equipment Regulations.
8-Button Display
16-Button Display
32-Button Display
16-Button LD
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 57
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
4-Button Display
DtermIP Terminal Features
DtermIP 4D
4 Line/Feature Access/ Programmable Feature Access Keys
9 Dedicated Function Keys: Feature, Recall, Conference, Redial, Hold, Transfer, Answer,
Speaker, Microphone
4 Local Soft Keys Controls (detail functions are dependent on PBX)
DtermIP 8D
8 Line/Feature Access/ Programmable Feature Access Keys
11 Dedicated Function Keys: Feature, Recall, Conference, Redial, Hold, Transfer, Answer,
Speaker, Microphone, Directory, Message
4 Local Soft Keys Controls (detail functions are dependent on PBX)
DtermIP 16D
16 Line/Feature Access/ Programmable Feature Access Keys
11 Dedicated Function Keys: Feature, Recall, Conference, Redial, Hold, Transfer, Answer,
Speaker, Microphone, Directory, Message
4 Local Soft Keys Controls (detail functions are dependent on PBX)
DtermIP 16LD
16 Line/Feature Access/ Programmable Feature Access Keys
11 Dedicated Function Keys: Feature, Recall, Conference, Redial, Hold, Transfer, Answer,
Speaker, Microphone, Directory, Message
4 Local Soft Keys Controls (detail functions are dependent on PBX)
DtermIP 32D
32 Line/Feature Access/ Programmable Feature Access Keys
11 Dedicated Function Keys: Feature, Recall, Conference, Redial, Hold, Transfer, Answer,
Speaker, Microphone, Directory, Message
4 Local Soft Keys Controls (detail functions are dependent on PBX)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 58
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
DtermIP Terminal Features
Display Features
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
All Models: 3 lines by 24 Characters
Brightness Control LCD Contrast
All Models: Yes
Adjustable LCD Display
Dterm 4, 8, 16, 16LD, 32 models only
Backlit Display Compatible
Dterm 16D (BL) model only
Receiver Volume Control
Handset
All Models: Yes
Full Duplex Speaker Phone
All Models: Yes
Ring Volume Control
All Models: Yes
Miscellaneous
On-Line Firmware Upgradeable
All Models: Yes
DHCP
All Models: Client Support
Call Message Indicator
All Models: Yes
Headset
Dterm 8, 16, 16LD, 32 models only
Supported Adapters
AD(A)-2R (Local Recording)
PS(A)-R (Local Line Survivable)
Adjustable Base
All Models: Yes*
*For Dterm 4D - Terminal height can be adjusted with
removal/addition of the base unit.
Built-in Wall Mount
All Models: Yes
Built-in Headset Jack
Dterm 8, 16, 16LD, 32 models only
Housing Color: Black
All Models: Yes
Housing Color: White
Dterm 8, 16, 16LD, 32 models only
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 59
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
DtermIP Terminal Specifications
Network Parameters
Internet Layer
All Models: IPv4
IP Protocol
All Models: NEC Peer-to-Peer (only)
Jitter Buffer
All Models: Max 300msec (10msec steps)
Payload Interval
All Models: 10ms ~ 40ms (10ms steps)
IP Addressing
All Models: DHCP or Static Assignable
QoS
All Models: 801.p, ToS and Diff-Service
Power Support Options
External
All Models: AC: 24V, Current: 750mA
Operating Temperature
All Models: 0 - 40 deg C (32 - 103 deg F)
Spare Pair Power
All Models: Yes
In-Line Power
All Models: Yes
External Power via
AC adapter
All Models: Yes (Optional adapter)
Quality of Service
All Models: Yes
Layer 2: 802.1p/Q; Layer 3: IP Precedence, Diff-Services
Equipment Specification Size (W x D x H)
Tilt up: 7.57" x 8.69" x 5.57"
DtermIP 4D
Tilt down: 7.57" x 8.69" x 3.80" (without stand unit)
Weight: 1.98lbs
Tilt up: 9.09" x 8.54" x 5.28"
DtermIP 8D
Tilt down: 9.09" x 8.54" x 4.17"
Weight: 2.51lbs
Tilt up: 9.09" x 8.54" x 5.28"
DtermIP 16D
Tilt down: 9.09" x 8.54" x 4.17"
Weight: 2.51lbs
Tilt up: 9.09" x 9.88" x 5.28"
DtermIP 16LD
Tilt down: 9.09" x 9.88" x 4.17"
Weight: 2.91lbs
Tilt up: 9.09" x 9.57" x 5.28"
DtermIP 32D
Tilt down: 9.09" x 9.57" x 4.17"
Weight: 2.84lbs
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 60
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
DtermIP Terminal Specifications
DtermIP 4D
Voltage: 48V
Current: 90ma
Power Consumption: 4.32W
Audio Algorithm: G.711, G.729A
Protocol Support: 802.3af (CDP and NDP with ILPA integration)
10/100 base T (IEEE 802.3), RJ 45
DtermIP 8D
Voltage: 48V
Current: 92ma
Power Consumption: 6.4W
Audio Algorithm: G.711, G.729A, G.723.1
Protocol Support: 802.3af and CDP (NDP with ILPA integration)
10/100 base T (IEEE 802.3), RJ 45 multi-port Switch
DtermIP 16D
Voltage: 48V
Current: 92ma
Power Consumption: 6.4W
Audio Algorithm: G.711, G.729A, G.723.1
Protocol Support: 802.3af and CDP (NDP with ILPA integration)
10/100 base T (IEEE 802.3), RJ 45 multi-port Switch
DtermIP 32D
Voltage: 48V
Current: 92ma
Power Consumption: 6.4W
Audio Algorithm: G.711, G.729A, G.723.1
Protocol Support: 802.3af and CDP (NDP with ILPA integration)
10/100 base T (IEEE 802.3), RJ 45 multi-port Switch
DtermIP 16LD
Voltage: 48V
Current: 92ma
Power Consumption: 6.4W
Audio Algorithm: G.711, G.729A, G.723.1
Protocol Support: 802.3af and CDP (NDP with ILPA integration)
10/100 base T (IEEE 802.3), RJ 45 multi-port Switch
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 61
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Dterm Series i (TDM) Digital Terminals
The Dterm Series i Terminals are designed to provide ergonomic form and user-friendly
functions. With advanced digital circuitry, the Dterm Series i consists of distinct models to meet
users' diverse telephone terminal needs.
Dterm Series i Terminals offer adjustable display and non-display units with menu-driven soft
key operation, allowing users to program terminals at the desktop. Standard features include
headset jacks, wall mount units and adjustable base units. The display units are equipped with
large LCD panels with three lines of display, each with 24 characters. A 16-button backlit
display version is available for installations in dimly lighted areas such as restaurants, night
clubs, and residential applications. Easy to see in either dark or bright applications, the backlight
feature may expand installation opportunities and markets.
The Dterm Series i Display Terminals have four soft keys located just under the display of each
Terminal. These menu-driven soft keys allow users’ convenient access too many features. The
state of the terminal will determine what soft key is available to the user. According to the status
of the Multiline Terminal, functions of the soft keys are displayed in the third line on the LCD.
If the status of the Multiline Terminal changes, the soft keys displayed will change
automatically.
Dedicated function keys provide easy one-touch access to the most common telephone
operations. These keys include: Feature, Recall, Conference, Redial, Hold, Transfer, Answer,
Speaker, Microphone, Directory, and Message.
All Dterm Series i telephones are an ideal choice for both businesses and remote users in
residential home offices. All Dterm Series i telephones are Class B devices and comply with
U.S. FCC regulations for office and residential use, and with requirements of the Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
2-Button Non-Display
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
8-Button Non-Display
Page 62
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
8-Button Display
32-Button Display
16-Button Display
60-Line DSS/BLF Console
4-Button Display
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 63
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
16-Button LD
16LD-Desi-Less ADM
Standard features of the Digital models
Large Message Waiting LED
24 Character, 3 Line LCD on display equipped models
Tilt LCD Unit
Adjustable Base
Built-in Wall Mount Unit
Built-in Headset Jack Connector Note 1
14 Programmable Ring Tones
Speed Dial/DSS Buttons
Programmable Line Keys with 2 Color LED
Backlit Display on 16-Button Model
Four Local Soft key Controls (detail functions are dependent on PBX, only provided on
terminals with display)
• Eleven dedicated Function Keys: Feature, Recall, Conference, Redial, Hold, Transfer,
Answer, Speaker, Mic*, Directory*, and Message*. (*Functionality dependant upon
system software.)
• Built-in Half Duplex Handsfree Unit
• Snap-in Options Available: Note 1
- AP(R): Analog TEL connection with Ringing Signal Generation
- AP(A): Analog TEL connection without Ringing Signal Generation or Disconnect
Signal
- AD(A): Tape-recorder connection
- CT(A): CTI Adapter, RS-232-C (9-pin) interface
- IP-R: VoIP Adapter
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Note 1: Not available with DTR-2DT and DTR-4D terminals.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 64
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Series i Multi-line Terminal Descriptions
DTR-2DT (BK) TEL
DTR-2DT (WH) TEL
DTR-4D (BK) TEL
DTR-8 (BK) TEL
DTR-8 (WH)TEL
DTR-8D (BK) TEL
DTR-8D (WH) TEL
DTR-16D (BK) TEL
DTR-16D (WH) TEL
DTR-32D (BK) TEL
DTR-32D (WH) TEL
DCR-60 (BK)
CONSOLE
DCR-60 (WH)
CONSOLE
16 LINE Back-Lit
16LD-ADM
2 LINE TERMINAL - available in black (BK) or white (WH).
(does not support optional adapters)
Fully modular with 2 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, nine Function
Keys, built-in Speakerphone, electronic volume and tone controls.
4 LINE TERMINAL – available in black (BK) only.
(does not support optional adapters)
Fully modular with 4 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, nine Function
Keys, built-in Speakerphone, 24-character by 3-line display, four
softkeys, Large LED, Electronic Volume and Tone Controls.
8 LINE TERMINAL – available in black (BK) or white (WH).
Fully modular with 8 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, eleven Function
Keys, built-in Speakerphone, headset jack, wall mount unit, four
softkeys, Large LED, Electronic Volume and Tone Controls and tilt
stand.
8 LINE DISPLAY TERMINAL - available in black (BK) or white (WH).
Fully modular with 8 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, eleven Function
Keys, built-in Speakerphone, headset jack, wall mount unit, 24character by 3-line display, four softkeys, Large LED, Electronic
Volume and Tone Controls, and tilt stand.
16 LINE DISPLAY TERMINAL - available in black (BK) or white (WH).
Fully modular with 16 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, eleven Function
Keys, built-in Speakerphone, headset jack, wall mount unit, 24character by 3-line display, four softkeys, Large LED, Electronic
Volume and Tone Controls and tilt stand.
32 LINE DISPLAY TERMINAL - available in black (BK) or white (WH).
Fully modular with 32 Flexible, 2-color LED Line keys, eleven Function
Keys, built-in Speakerphone, headset jack, wall mount unit, 24character by 3-line display, four softkeys, Large LED, Electronic
Volume and Tone Controls and tilt stand.
ATTENDANT ADD-ON CONSOLE - Requires an AC-R ADP
(included).
Fully modular with 48 programmable, 2-color LED keys (for station
trunk appearances), 12 Function keys with red LED, and tilt stand.
Terminal available in: black (BK) or white (WH).
16 LINE Back-Lit DISPLAY TERMINAL
Fully modular with 16 flexible, 2-color LED line keys, eight function
keys, built-in speakerphone, headset jack, wall mount unit, back- lit 24character by 3-line display, four softkeys, large LED, electronic volume
and tone controls and tilt stand. Terminal available in: black (BK).
Dterm Series i Add-on Module extend the capabilities of the 16LD
terminals with additional buttons and an LCD display. This expansion
module adds 16 buttons, increasing the total number of buttons with
one module. The large LCD display of the 16LD-ADM allows quick
and easy identification of associated buttons. The 16 buttons on each
of the expansion modules can be programmed as speed dial keys or a
directory number.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 65
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Specification for Series i Digital Terminals
Item
Description
Curl Cord Length
12ft
Weight (no handset)
510g (min.)
LCD Display
24 digit x 3 line (alphanumeric and some
characters) no back light
Ringing Sound Level
Max. 80dBSPL (in output limit condition)
Max. 86dBSPL (in normal condition)
Built in Hands Free
Half duplex
Items Provided with Instrument
Line cord, Directory card
Handset Cradle
K type compatible
LCD angle
14~42.5 deg. (on the desk, no housing tilt)
25~53.5 deg. (on the desk, housing tilt up)
-4.4 deg. (wall mounting)
Housing Face Angle
14~25 deg. (on the desk)
-4.4 deg. (wall mounting)
Recommended Headset
NEC Headsets
Other
HAC
Dterm Series i Digital Terminal Options
Item
Description
WM-R Unit
Series i Multi-line Terminals with an AP(R)-R, AP (A)-R, CT (A)-R,
and/or an IP-R Unit can be wall mounted using the WM-R Unit.
AD(A)-R Unit
Provides Series i Multi-line Terminals ability to interface with
recording device.
AP( R)-R Unit
Provides Series i Multi-line Terminals ability to interface with analog
device such as a cordless telephone, facsimile machine, external
speakerphone, Automatic Dialer or modem. Provides ringing to
analog device connected. Requires an AC-R ADP.
AP(A)-R Unit
Provides Series i Multi-line Terminals ability to interface with analog
device such as a cordless telephone, facsimile machine, external
speakerphone, Automatic Dialer or modem. No ringing is provided.
CT(A)-R Unit
IP-R Unit
AC-R Unit
Connects a Series i Multi-line Terminal to a PC providing a complete
turnkey package with graphical telephone user interface and call
logging. Shipped with Multi-line Phone Kits software. Supports
Serial interface.
A compact plug-and-play device that installs into the base of a Dterm
Series i display terminal. Integrated two-port 10/100baseT Ethernet
pass through hub that permits using one port to connect the network
interface card (NIC) from the PC to the IP network. The other is
plugged directly into a LAN or an IP network device such as a router,
DSL modem or cable modem. Requires an AC-R ADP.
AC adapter for DSS/BLF Console, AP(A), AP(R), or IP-R Unit
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 66
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Dterm Series i Line Conditions
8DLC
300m (984ft)
with AC Adapter
Note 4
Note 2
4DLC
300m (984ft)
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
850m (2789ft)
1200m (3937ft)
8DLC
200m (656ft)
Note 2
4DLC
200m (656ft)
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
850m (2789ft)
1200m (3937ft)
8DLC
200m (656ft)
Note 2
4DLC
200m (656ft)
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
850m (2789ft)
1200m (3937ft)
8DLC
-
300m (984ft)
4DLC
-
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
-
1200m (3937ft)
Cable Length Note 1
Dterm Series i
Dterm 8 / 8D
Dterm 16/16D
Dterm 32/32D
DSS/BLF Console
Note 3
Standard
Note 1: Cable length is based on the following conditions.
•
Diameter of the cable is 0.5 mm.
•
The Protection arrester is not inserted between the terminal and PBX.
Note 2: When using 8DLC card, it is not available for long line function, even if it is equipped
with AC Adapter.
Note 3: The DSS/BLF Console requires local AC/DC supply.
Note 4: DTR-2DT and DTR-4D terminals do not support long line adapters.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 67
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Dterm Series E (TDM) Digital Terminals
The Dterm Series E terminals are designed to provide ergonomic form and user-friendly
functions. With advanced digital circuitry, the Dterm Series E consists of distinct models to
meet users' diverse telephone terminal needs.
Dterm Series E terminals offer adjustable display and non-display units with menu-driven soft
key operation, allowing users to program terminals at the desktop. The display units are
equipped with large LCD panels with three lines of display, each with 24 characters. Each
terminal offers an optional full duplex speaker phone operation for two-way conversation.
Standard features include headset jacks, wall mount units and adjustable base units.
The Dterm Series E Display Terminals have four soft keys located just under the display of each
Terminal. These menu-driven soft keys allow user’s convenient access too many features. The
state of the terminal will determine what soft key is available to the user. According to the status
of the Multiline Terminal, functions of the soft keys are displayed in the third line on the LCD.
If the status of the Multiline Terminal changes, the soft keys displayed will change
automatically.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 68
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Dterm Series E Terminals
8-Line Non-Display
16-Line Display
8-Line Display
32-Line Display
60-Line DSS/BLF/Add-On Module
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 69
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Dterm Series E Terminals
8-Line Non-Display
8 programmable line/feature keys with two-color LED indication
8 dedicated Function Keys
Built-in speakerphone
ADA compatibility
Large Message waiting LED
This terminal is available in Black (BK) or White (WH).
8-Line Display
8 Programmable line/feature keys with two-color LED
8 dedicated Function Keys
Built-in speakerphone
ADA compatibility
Large Messaging Waiting LED
24-character, 3-line, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Four Softkeys
This terminal is available in Black (BK) or White (WH).
16-Line Display
16 Programmable line/feature keys with two-color LED
8 dedicated Function Keys
Built-in speakerphone
ADA compatibility
Large Messaging Waiting LED
24-character, 3-line, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Four Softkeys
This terminal is available in Black (BK) or White (WH).
32-Line Display
16 Programmable line/feature keys with a two-color LED
16 SPD/DSS keys with two-color LED
8 dedicated Function Keys
Built-in speakerphone
ADA compatibility
Large Messaging Waiting LED
24-character, 3-line, adjustable Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Four Softkeys
This terminal is available in Black (BK) or White (WH).
60-Line DSS/BLF/Add-On Module
60 programmable line keys (each with a two-color LED)
This terminal is available in Black (BK) or White (WH).
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 70
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
DTERM SERIES E FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Four Local Soft key Controls (detail functions are dependent on PBX)
Large Message Waiting LED
24 Character, 3 Line LCD
Tilt LCD Unit
Adjustable Legs
Built-in Wall Mount Unit
Built-in Headset Jack Connector
Speed Dial/DSS Buttons
Programmable Line Keys with 2 Color LED
Eight dedicated function keys (Feature, Recall, Conf, Redial, Hold, Transfer,
Answer & Speaker)
Built-in Half Duplex Handsfree Unit
Optional: Full Duplex HFU (consist of HFU-U Unit, External Microphone Unit
and AC adapter)
Snap-in Options Available:
- ADA-U (Ancillary Device Adapter)
- APR-U (Analog Port Adapter with Ringing)
- HFU-U (External Handsfree Unit)
- ACA-U (AC Adapter Unit)
- WMU-U (External Wall mount Unit)
- WMU-W (External Wall mount Unit for DTP-2 Terminals)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 71
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Dterm Series E Digital Terminal Options
Item
ADA-U UNIT
APR-U UNIT
APA-U UNIT
HFU-U UNIT
CTA-U
ACA-U UNIT
WMU-U UNIT
IPW-2U (ELC)
IPW-2U (P-P)
Description
Ancillary Device Adapter;
Used for External Recording Devices
Analog Port Adapter with Ringing, used to connect external
analog devices such as PC Modem, analog Cordless etc.
Requires ACA-U Unit for local power.
Analog Port Adapter without Ringing, Used for external
speakerphones.
Requires ACA-U Unit for local power when the connected
device is over
50 ft. from the APA-U Unit.
Full duplex Speakerphone with external microphone.
CTI Adapter Unit
AC Adapter provides local power for APR-U Unit, APA-U
Unit, CTA-U Unit, HFU-U Unit, IPW-U Unit, DESKCON, and
Dterm long line.
Wall Mount Unit, Required when using terminal adapters
attached to phone. If not using terminal adapters built-in
wall mount in phone is used.
The IPW-2U (ELC) adapter is a full duplex switch, which
can be installed on any of the Dterm Series E display
phones. With this adapter, you can upgrade the 8, 16, 32button Dterm Series E terminals to VoIP when using the
PN-32IPLA (ELC) IP station card.
The IPW-2U (P-P) adapter is a full duplex switch, which can
be installed on any of the Dterm Series E display phones.
With this adapter, you can upgrade the 8, 16, 32-button
Dterm Series E terminals to VoIP when using Peer to Peer
connection.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 72
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Dterm Series E Line Conditions
Loop Resistance Note 1
Analog
Telephone Set
Loop Start
Trunk
Standard
600 ohms
Option
2,500 ohms
Exchange Line
1,700 ohms
Tie or DID Line
2,500 ohms
Cable Length Note 2
Dterm Series E
Dterm 8 / 8D
Dterm 16/16D
Dterm 32/32D
with AC Adapter
8DLC
300m (984ft)
Note 3
4DLC
300m (984ft)
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
850m (2789ft)
1200m (3937ft)
8DLC
200m (656ft)
Note 3
4DLC
200m (656ft)
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
850m (2789ft)
1200m (3937ft)
8DLC
200m (656ft)
Note 3
4DLC
200m (656ft)
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
850m (2789ft)
1200m (3937ft)
Dterm 8D-1IP
_
Max. 328 ft. between Ether/IP-PAD and
Router/ Switching Hub
Dterm 16D-1IP
_
Max. 328 ft. between Ether/IP-PAD and
Router/ Switching Hub
Dterm 32D-1IP
_
Max. 328 ft. between Ether/IP-PAD and
Router/ Switching Hub
DSS/BLF Console
Note 4
Operator
Position
Standard
8DLC
-
300m (984ft)
4DLC
-
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
-
1200m (3937ft)
Same as Dterm Series E
Attendant Terminal
SN716
Desk Console
8DLC
300m (984ft)
Note 3
4DLC
350m (1148ft)
1200m (3937ft)
2DLC
350m (1148ft)
1200m (3937ft)
Note 1: Loop resistance includes an internal resistance of telephone set or distant exchange.
Note 2: Cable length is based on the following conditions.
Diameter of the cable is 0.5 mm.
The Protection arrester is not inserted between the terminal and PBX.
Note 3: When using 8DLC card, it is not available for long line function, even if it is equipped
with AC Adapter.
Note 4: The DSS/BLF Console requires local AC/DC supply.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 73
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Dterm Cordless Terminals
With the NEC Cordless product line, the distance of your handset cord does not govern your
work area. The mobility, convenience and reliability of these cost-effective telephones empower
employees to answer calls regardless of their location. Potential customers do not waste time
playing telephone tag, and employees are not glued to their desk waiting for that all-important
call. Business is not lost because of callers being able to reach a live person. The NEC Cordless
application is the ideal solution for those businesses that require mobility but do not want to
invest in a full-blown wireless solution.
Dterm Cordless II
Dterm Headset Cordless II
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Dterm Cordless Lite II
Plantronics CT Cordless
Page 74
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
DTERM CORDLESS II
Dterm designed for employees who need digital multiline desktop functionality in a cordless
handset. The 2x16 line display provides valuable calling information. The Dterm Cordless II is
designed to eliminate noise and provides a range of up to 350 feet.
Dterm Cordless II Telephone Features
Advanced Digital Technology eliminates noise and provides an extended range.
Direct interface to digital interface port on NEC telephone systems.
Programmable Function Keys let you utilize features of your telephone system with
the Dterm Cordless Multiline Terminal.
2x16 Digit LCD displays messages, including caller name and number.*
Conference calling saves time and improves office communication.
Compatibility enhances the Electra Elite IPK, UNIVERGE NEAX® 2000 and
UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 telephone systems.
Message LED indicates messages in voice mail.
Headset jack for hands-free operation.
Hold mode for handling multiple calls.
Transfer function for switching lines.
Color- black
Note: Different displays - The Dterm Cordless II Multiline Terminal handset operates with
the NEC Electra Elite IPK, UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 and UNIVERGE NEAX 2400 systems
supporting the Dterm Series III/E/i interface. Connection with each system will result in
system-specific displays.
*Dterm Cordless II Multiline Terminal will display caller name or number if Caller ID is a feature of
the host system.
Dterm Cordless II Specifications
The Dterm Cordless II complies with FCC and IC parts 15 and 68.
General:
Frequency Control: Phase Lock Loop
Modulation: Spread Spectrum
Operating Temp: 0° to 50° C (32° to 122° F)
Output Power: 63 mW
Occupied Bandwidth: 1,600 kHz
Data Transmission Speed: 688 bps
Base Unit:
Receive/Transmit Freq.: 902 MHz - 928 MHz
Power Requirements: 10 Vdc from supplied AC adapter
Size: 4-1/4 in. W x 7-1/2 in. D x 2-1/4 in. H
Weight: approximately 15.4 oz.
Handset:
Receive/Transmit Freq.: 902 MHz - 928 MHz
Power Requirements: Nickel-Cadmium Battery Pack
Battery Charger:
Power Requirements: 9V DC from supplied AC adapter
Size: 2-1/5 in. W x 1-2/3 in. D x 8-2/3 in. H (with antenna)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 75
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
DTERM CORDLESS LITE II
Dterm designed for employees who need digital multiline desktop functionality in a cordless
handset. The 2x16 line display provides valuable calling information. The Dterm Cordless Lite
is designed to eliminate noise and provides a range of up to 150 feet. The Dterm Cordless Lite is
ideal when the range of the Dterm Cordless II is not required.
Dterm Cordless Lite II Features
900 MHz FM with ADPCM
2-line, 16-digit LCD Display
Dterm Cordless Lite II Headset Jack
Channel Selection Control
Ringer Volume Control
Handset Volume Control
Single Key Access to: Conference, Hold, Transfer, and Mute features
Four Programmable Keys: F1-F4
Separate Charging Stand with Spare Battery Charging Capability
Auto Standby
AutoTalk
Silent Alarm
Out of Range Protection
Low Battery Protection System
Key Pad Lock Feature
Wall Mountable Separate Base Unit
Wall Mountable Separate Charging Unit
Easy Installation
Compact Handset Design
Use with an NEC Digital Multiline Terminal or as a stand-alone device
Dterm Cordless Lite II Telephone Specifications
General:
Frequency Control: Phase Lock Loop
Modulation: 900 MHz FM with ADPMC (digital)
Operating Temperature: 0° to +50° C (+32° to +122° F)
Bandwidth: 50 kHz
Data Transmission Speed: 688 bps
Base Unit:
Receive/Transmit Frequency: 902 MHz - 928 MHz
Power Requirements: 10 Vdc from supplied AC adapter
Size: 4-1/4 in. W x 7-5/8 in. D x 2-1/4 in. H
Weight: Approximately 13.7 oz.
Handset:
Receive/Transmit Frequency: 902 MHz - 928 MHz
Power Requirements: NiMH Battery
Size: 2 in. W x 1-1/4 in. D x 5-1/2 in. H (with antenna)
Weight: Approximately 5.2 oz. with battery
Battery: 700 mAh, 3.6V
Talk Mode: 6 hours (typical)
Standby Mode: 5 days (typical)
Battery Charger:
Power Requirements: 9V DC from supplied AC adapter
Size: 1-3/8 in. W x 1-1/2 in. D x 2-1/4 in. H
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 76
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
DTERM HEADSET CORDLESS II
Dterm Headset Cordless II allows mobility and sound quality to handsfree conversations on your
Dterm Series i TDM phone with an APR-R Adapter. This NEC cordless, along with an APR-R
device, eliminates the need for a handset mechanical lifter. The Dterm Headset Cordless II and
Series I with an APR-R allow you to conveniently and automatically answer calls with the touch
of a button. Because it goes on and off hook electronically, you don’t have to be at your desk to
answer or hang up the phone.
No Mechanical Lifter Needed
Roam up to 300 feet in a typical office environment.
Talk for up to eight hours without recharging.
Fully recharge the headset in less than three hours; 80% recharged in 1.5 hours.
Answer and end calls while away from your desk with the touch of a button.
Noise-canceling microphone.
Quickly mute the microphone with the touch of a button.
Plantronics CT CORDLESS
Package includes Base Unit, Handset (with a standard battery 6 hours of Talk Time or 3½ days
of Standby), Belt Clip, M175 Headset, User Guide and AC Adapter. This compact unit is an
Analog single line device that operates in the 2.4 GHz Digital Spread Spectrum frequency range.
This unit is compatible with and Analog single line port, Analog Port Adapter or Analog
telephone line from Telco.
Specifications
2.4 GHz Cordless Headset Phone
Range of Up To 150 Feet
Audible Low Battery Indicator
Single Line Operation
Ultra-Compact Remote Unit with Belt Clip
Variable Range Volume Control
10 Number Speed Dial
Page / Find Feature
Redial / Flash
Mute with Audible Reminder
Talk / Charge / Power Indicator Lights
Built In Headset Stand
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 77
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Wireless Dterm PS Handset
DTERM PS (Personal Station)
The Dterm PS offers portability, clear digital signal quality and has the same features of a
desktop phone. Weighing less than 4 oz. with 6 hours of continuous talk time and 300 hours on
standby, the Dterm PS phone has been uniquely designed for people on the run. The Dterm PS
provides the freedom and convenience of a mobile phone with the advantages and features of a
desktop handset.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Continuous coverage – walk freely around your workplace while on a call.
No static or fading – audio quality indistinguishable from a desktop phone.
Small lightweight handset with long battery life.
Low power operation for compatibility in any environment.
Up to 512 PS Handsets
216 PS Simultaneous Connections
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 78
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
DTERM PS (Personal Station)
PS Handset
Dterm PS Features
• 2-Line Operation with Number Sharing
• Voice Mail Message Waiting
• Calling Party Name and Number display
• Support for Wireless Roaming
• Call Hold & Transfer
• Directory Dial (100 entries with name)
• Speed Dial (20 entries with name)
• Calling Party Number Redial & Last Number Redial (5 entries each)
• Headset Operation with Automatic Answer
• Vibration Alert
• Support for Modem Data
• 4 line, 18 Digit LCD Display (with scrolling)
• User-defined soft keys
And the provisioning of the Dterm PS data port facility to allow software updates
protects your investment.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 79
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Accessories for the Dterm PS
• Standard Battery Charger Base Unit
•
Lithium-ion Battery (provides up to 4 hours of continuous talk-time and 300 hours
on standby)
•
Leather Cases
- Leather Case with Swivel Clip - Includes a Swivel Belt Clip with Quick
Release
- Leather Case with Fixed Clip Includes a fixed Belt Clip
Both cases offer an Integrated D-Ring for use with the optional adjustable necklace.
The adjustable necklace (from 23" to 42") provides security from dropping the
handset while, for example, carrying it in a lab coat pocket.
•
Dterm PS Headset
- Head band type
- Single ear cover
- 47" cord
The Dterm PS Headset is a classic banded headset with a microphone extension. The
Dterm PS Headset is typically used in cases of prolonged active use (for example,
customer service agents).
•
Dterm PS Ear Piece
- Lower profile Ear Bud receiver
- In-line Microphone
- 47" cord
The Dterm PS Ear Piece is an ear-bud type with an in-line microphone. The Ear
Piece is for occasional use or where concealment is desired (for example, hotel
security).
•
Dterm PS Modem Cable
- Connects to the modem jack of your laptop or palmtop
- Supports speeds up to 19.2Kbps
- Autodial from PC Application (Application must support dialing without
waiting for dial tone)
•
Dterm PS Assistant Software - The Dterm PS Assistant software and interface cable
will allow you to enter the directory and speed-dial entries on your PC and upload to
your Dterm PS.
You can now:
- Enter, Synchronize and backup your Directory and Speed Dial entries
- Copy and paste entries from your Desktop Organizer and upload to your Dterm
PS.
- "Clone" all or some of your Dterm PS handset Directory and Speed Dial
entries, so everyone in your organization has access to key personnel and
department phone numbers.
There are two versions available: Dterm PS Personal Assistant and the Dterm PS
Group Assistant. The Personal Assistant supports only one Dterm PS handset while
the Group Assistant is designed to manage and maintain Directory and Speed Dial
entries for an entire workgroup. The PS Interface Cable connects to the PC serial
port and to the Dterm PS interface port, on the bottom of the handset.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 80
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Dterm SoftPhone (SP30)
The Dterm SP30 allows customers to capitalize on the advantages of a converged voice and data
network whether they’re in the office or on the road. The Dterm SP30 combines traditional
business communication needs with the data applications your customers require.
The Dterm SP30 optimally delivers high quality voice via a USB-connected headset. With a
simple drag and drop, the Dterm SP30 allows telephone dialing from other telephone directory
applications such as Microsoft Outlook®, HTML pages and Word® documents, etc. In addition,
the Dterm SP30 provides an interface to Microsoft’s Telephony Application Programming
Interface (TAPI) via NEC OpenWorX integration, allowing TAPI-enabled applications, such as
Outlook and ACT, to make and receive calls. The Dterm SP30 has the ability to use a wireless
handset (PS) for all voice connections instead of the USB handset. The Dterm SP30 can be
displayed in 1 of 4 different colors (black, red, gold and neon blue) in order to reflect the
“personality” of the day. The Dterm SP30 also allows for 3 different modes of operation.
Maximized mode: Access to full line of softphone features such as application sharing,
member lists, conference mode, chatting capabilities, Internet access and many others are
just one click away.
Compact Mode: L-shaped user interface, operating in a small footprint on the PC
screen. Compact view allows the softphone to remain active while another application
window such as a Word document; database file or email is the primary focus on the PC.
With the compact view, the most popular features of the converged softphone are just a
click away.
Task Mode: The softphone can be minimized and shown as a task within a Microsoft
Operating System. While operating in this mode, the softphone will output an audio
notification to the user upon receiving an incoming call. It will be up to the user to utilize
the hot key in order to activate the Dterm SP30 application and answer the call.
ACD Mode: The Dterm SP30 ACD client can support two operation modes, ACD and
Business. The Business mode is the default mode. When the ACD mode is configured a
new set of function keys becomes available to the Dterm SP30 ACD user. A popup menu
is also available when in the ACD terminal mode. While in ACD mode the Instant
Messaging feature functions to the MY Line of the terminal, not the ACD Line.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 81
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 82
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Key Features and Benefits
The Dterm SP30 offers a full complement of station and converged features for an important
segment of mobility and PC-based applications. Even though a majority of the hardware
telephone features function on the softphone, the main focus for the softphone is its ability to
deliver PC capabilities to the telephone.
Displays call records in Quick Reference List via the Call Log Window: All calls
are recorded in a Call Log. Telephone number, date of the call and identification as to
whether or not the call was received and answered are all logged. You can find at a glance
when and with whom you talked. The Dterm SP30 also offers a call memo function whereby
you can record the key points of the call so that you can visually identify the individual
records.
Links with PC applications: Now you can collaborate on a white board application
(Word® or Excel® document or any other application) that is operating on your PC and the
PC at a distant site. Simply place a call to the far-end Dterm SP30 user and activate the
application you will be collaborating on. You are now able to have a more productive
conversation.
Internet Link: The Dterm SP30 can be assigned with a common database link for fast
access to a particular site. This link could be an Internet link that needs to be accessed when
receiving or placing a call (i.e., you receive a call from a customer and need to look up
information that is contained in a database). Previously, you needed to locate and launch the
application before loading the file. Now with the Dterm SP30, simply select the Internet link
and the database file is opened, bringing it all together in one user interface.
Real Time Communication: In addition to providing a voice and data collaboration link,
you can also chat with a remote Dterm SP30. This is ideal for the real quick conversation
you need with a distant Dterm SP30 user. Maybe you’re on a call and need to get a quick
response from a co-worker. There’s no need to put the customer on hold and call the coworker for an answer. Instead, send a chat message and get your answer in real time. The
Dterm SP30 will store all your chat messages in a log so that you can use them for future
reference. Additional features of the Dterm SP30: forwarding control selection for different
call modes, videoconferencing capabilities, automatic downloading of telephony features to
the display and diagnostic capacities for audio problem notification.
Presence/Status: The presence/status functionality allows the user to confirm a buddy’s
presence/status with a visual indication (ICON) and text message on the Dterm SP30 GUI.
The presence/status information is provided by the OpenWorX servers (LSI) package.
8/6 Party Conference Control: When the trunk conferencing card is configured within
the voice switch and the voice trunk channel is configured in the program utility for the
Dterm SP30, a user can dynamically setup and save future dated collaboration conferences.
All the conferences can be activated immediately upon configuration or saved for a future
date upon activation. When the conference is activated, the Dterm SP30, with the help of the
Voice sever, places calls to the configured participants based on the number which are user
predefined. Conferences do not require users to be Dterm SP30 users for voice only
conference calls. Only Dterm SP30 users will utilize additional features like application
sharing and messaging during call.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 83
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
PHS/PCS Collaboration: PHS/PCS collaboration links the wireless handset capabilities
to the Dterm SP30 GUI. In this mode, all the voice connections will be directed across the
PS infrastructure instead of through Dterm SP30 USB handset. The Dterm SP30 gui will
give the indication that it has received a call such as caller ID, ringing information and
notification as to the state of the line. The only thing that changes is voice path direction
being directed to the PS handset. The Dterm SP30 will provide data collaboration interface.
The benefits for this functionality are as follows:
1. User has a more reliable voice connection with the voice server. The PS provides a
constant voice connection over that of the IP voice connection.
2. Dterm SP30 user now has a handset which can be ported from place to place without
the need for programming call forward functionality of the phone.
3. Now the user can be reached by one number, no matter if call forwarding is set or the
user is located next to the Dterm SP30.
4. User now has a physical device which they can use for dialing and answering calls
instead of working with mouse’s and keyboards.
5. User is no longer locked to their PC for receiving and answer calls. The user is as
portable as the in-building wireless network.
Voice Recording: A user will be able record the voice connection and save the wave file
on a network storage place of their choice. It is recommended all voice recording be stored
on a local hard drive and not a network drive. With the activation of the voice recording of
the Dterm SP30, no extra recording equipment other than the Dterm SP30 phase 2
application with a USB headset is required. For those specific regions which require the
notification to the remote party that a voice connection is being recorded, the Dterm SP30
provides for the setting of an automatic beep tone in the configuration menus. Beep tone can
also be conditioned to send a tone notification at user selectable intervals.
One Key Operation: The space bar key on the keyboard for the Dterm SP30 PC can be
configured in such a way to allow fast access to placing calls, receiving calls and termination
of calls. You are no longer required to utilize a combination of the keyboard and mouse to
access these telephone features.
Call Log Export: The Dterm SP30 provides for the capability of saving the call log file in
a “.cvs” file format in addition to the administrator/user selecting a network storage place for
the file. When opening the file with application render capable of displaying “*.cvs” files,
columns breaking out caller direction, date and time, caller ID, duration of the call,
notification of whether the call was recorded and memo information are displayed.
Voice Quality Alarm: The Dterm SP30 is able to provide notification to the user when it is
perceived to be transmitting and/or receiving voice problems. When the Dterm SP30
application detects a voice problem an alarm is lit on the GUI and information about the
audio problem is stored in the maintenance log file.
2 Line Display: When the Dterm SP30 is set for a compact mode, the display which is
shown is only capable of displaying one line of information. When configuring the Dterm
SP30 to a 2 line display, the display is able to switch (1 second intervals) between the normal
2 lines of display.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 84
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Automatic Idle Return: This function allows for automatic disconnection during ROT or
BT tone being heard due to disconnecting by remote party. Administrator/user can choose to
disable or enable this function within the user configuration. The default for this
configuration is disabled.
PB tone sending: During a call, a PB tone of the dial number which is set on the member
button can be sent by selecting the [send PB tone] with a right-mouse click of speed dial
number.
Pause into Dialing string: This feature allows the user to insert a pause into the dialed
number during the following conditions:
Drag/drop into the LCD or telephone ICON.
Copy/Paste
Placing/transferring a call with “Call to:” tag
Placing/transferring a call and sending the PB tone with using the member button.
Last Number Redial: A Dterm SP30 user can do a quick access and call to the most
recent call placed by the SP30. During the idle stage a user can redial the telephone
numbers previously dialed by selecting the [Redial] in pop up menu which appears by
right-clicking on a “Call” button.
Redial via Call Log: The Dterm SP30 is capable of displaying the last 32 calling/called
telephone numbers. This is done by depressing the Up/Down arrow key (Keyboard)
when the LCD field is highlighted.
First number displayed on LCD screen will be the most recent called/received
telephone number.
Pressing the arrow up will cycle from the most recent to the latest calls/received
telephone number.
Pressing the arrow down button will cycle from the last to most recent calls
received/placed by the user.
One Touch Button in Compact Mode: A button called the “One Touch” button has
been added to the compact panel. The “One Touch” button allows access quick access to
your speed dial list (Buddy List) that is conditioned on the main GUI under the Member
buttons. By clicking the “One Touch” button, you can place a call or transfer a call to any of
the member’s numbers that has pre-registered on the main GUI.
Notification of Call Received with No Answer: The Dterm SP30 Call Log button
which is located on the main and compact panel will flash in blue when a call was receive by
the Dterm SP30 but not answered. Before the integration of the blinking call Log button the
only way a user was noted that a call was received was if the remote party left a voice mail.
In those case where there was no voicemail message was left, the user had no way of
identifying whether calls were received or not. Users can confirm visual that a call was
received and immediately reply to the caller when they become available.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 85
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
Application Collaboration: The NEC Dterm SP30 allows users to share ideas,
information and programs in a variety of ways while either in a point-to-point connection or
6/8 party conference mode.
o Videoconferencing - The Dterm SP30 audio and videoconferencing feature lets you
communicate with anyone on the NEC Network.
Share ideas, information, and applications using video and audio
Send and receive real-time images using Windows-compatible equipment
Allows for broadcasting of the live video to other Dterm SP30 users which might not
have video transmission capabilities.
Use of a video camera to instantly view items, such as hardware devices, road
conditions or even personnel, which are displayed in front of the camera
o Whiteboard - The whiteboard lets you collaborate in real time with other Dterm SP30
users via graphic design. With the whiteboard, you can review, create and update graphic
information.
Manipulate contents by clinking, dragging and dropping information on the white
board with a mouse/keyboard.
Copy, cut and paste information from any Windows-based application into the
whiteboard.
Use different-colored pointers to easily differentiate participant’s comments.
Save the whiteboard contents either at the local side or distant end location
Load saved whiteboard pages, enabling you to prepare information before a
conference, then drag and drop it into the whiteboard during an audio meeting
o Chat - The chat functionality lets you conduct real-time conversations via text with as
many Dterm SP30 users as you like. With chat, you can:
Type text messages to communicate with other co-workers during a conference
All messages are sent in a whisper mode so that they are only received by one party
All messages sent and received are saved automatically in the chat log
Automatic pop up notification when a chat message is received
ICON notification within the chat log identifying different states of the messages
o File Transfer - File transfer lets you send one or more files to distant Dterm SP30 users.
With file transfer, you can:
Send a file to other Dterm SP30 users
Accept or reject transferred files
o Application Sharing - Dterm SP30 gives you better control over how shared programs
are displayed on your desktop and give the person sharing the program control over who
uses it.
View shared programs in a frame, which makes it easy to distinguish between shared
and local applications on your desktop
Minimize the shared program frame and do other work if you don not need to work
in the current conference program.
Easily switch between shared programs using the shared programs taskbar.
Approve conference participants’ requests to work in the program you introduce.
Allow or prevent others from working in a program using the sharing dialog menu.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 86
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
INASETTM
INASET terminals are members of the Dterm IP family. INASET terminals have a Web
browser with a large color display and a built-in multi-port Ethernet switch for connectivity to
the user’s local PC. INASET terminals bring a wealth of information to the desktop, including
short text display messages and Web pages specifically tailored for the small screen format
The INASET’s basic load includes a graphical telephony application that provides an abundance
of telephony information and desktop control that is easy to use with its menu-based interface.
Information and controls accessible via the softkeys and feature buttons include:
• Line status showing a visual icon display for the status of all assigned phone lines and
DSS lines.
• Caller information showing a visual text display for things such as time, date and call
status information.
• Telephony Directory for storing, searching and dialing different profiles which you can
categorize and store in one of three different groups: corporate, personal and group.
• Web access providing browsing capabilities to display HTML web-based information
located on the Internet or Intranet. Also includes support for Java applets.
• Virtual keys providing access to features, functions and recent keys activated on the
terminal. The user can program display and functions for how they see fit with limited or
no administrative support necessary.
By converging a company’s voice and data networks, there is only one network to manage. The
INASET includes a built-in switch, so you can use a single Ethernet switch port for the computer
(data) and the INASET. Because it’s an IP based telephone, it can be installed anywhere on a
corporate IP network. The INASET is Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
compatible and doesn’t require the need to be co-located with the UNIVERGE NEAX PBX
equipment. INASET supports G.711, G.729a and G.723.1 audio compression for low-bandwidth
requirements.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 87
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
INASET Applications
The INASET is specifically suited for the enterprise environment, including the following end
users: managers, purchasing agents, consultants and call agents. But this is just the beginning.
This advanced IP business terminal can be programmed to do much more than a standard
business phone. For example, the customizable user interface (that’s developed with the SDK)
can replace single line phones that are typically installed in cafeterias, break rooms, lobbies and
manufacturing floors. The INASET’s programmability is also ideal for traders, stockbrokers, real
estate brokers, executives, PR professionals and any other occupation in which professionals use
Internet-related information to interact with the public.
• Personalization at the desktop: Individual customization can bring flexibility to the
desktop. Software developers can enhance traditional features such as Answer, Redial,
Conference, Recall and Help menus.
• Centralized services: Information or features that need to be accessed by numerous
individuals within the organization can be centralized on servers. Directory service
functions, Intranet web site information, customer records, CTI applications and other
work group applications are examples of centralized services that could improve
portability and use throughout the enterprise network.
INASET terminals
Description
Remarks
ITR-240G-1 (BK)
The INASET 240G has a 3” LCD with a gray scale 240 x
160 pixel display and 16 programmable keys.
Supports Power over Ethernet (POE) (802.3af and Cisco
Discovery Protocol).
Available in black only.
ITR-320C-1 (BK)
The INASET 320C has a 5.1” color display and 32
programmable keys.
Supports Power over Ethernet (POE) (802.3af and Cisco
Discovery Protocol).
Available in black only.
ITR-320G-1 (BK)
The INASET 320G has a 5.1” LCD with gray scale display
and 32 programmable keys. Supports Power over
Ethernet (POE) (802.3af and Cisco Discovery Protocol).
Available in black only
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 88
CHAPTER 3 TERMINALS
INASET Accessories
Description
Remarks
WM-RL UNIT
Wall mount for the ITR-LC-1
INASET Headset Cord 12’
12 Foot Black Handset Cord
INASET Headset Cord 25’
25 Foot Black Handset Cord
AC-R
AC adapter for the INASET
ILPA-R
802.3af power Dongle for INASET Original
ADA-2R
Audio recording adapter for IP terminals
MIC-R (BK/WH) UNIT
External Microphone for INASET 240, 320s
PSA-R
Analog survivable adapter
INASET Basic Network Capability
• Dual port 10/100 Mbps Ethernet switch
• Internal voice packet prioritization
• VLAN support (802.1q & 802.1p frame tagging)
• Configurable ToS bits (DiffServ and IP Precedence support)
• Powering
• Inline power (unused pairs) or
• Direct powering with external wall-plug adapter
PBX System Requirements
• UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS R6.1or higher
• IPPAD Card
• 8 Seat Licenses: Supports up to 8 INASET terminals
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 89
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Chapter 4 Equipment Description
Modules
Abbrev
Name Code
Remarks
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM)
Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM.
Houses two batteries for protection from short power
interruption (for 30 minutes).
At maximum configuration, the system consists of
eight PIMs, and provides a total of 512 physical ports
(64 ports × 8).
SN1730
PIMMK
PIM
Port Interface Module (PIM) for Backup CPU System Maximum 64 physical ports per PIM. Houses two
batteries for protection from short power interruption
(for 30 minutes).
One PIM is required per Backup CPU System.
COVER
PARTS
ASSEM
COVER
PARTS
ASSEM
Cover Parts Assembly
One cover parts assembly is required for each PIM.
SN1545
BASERE
TOP COVER
ASSEM
BASE/TOP
ASSEM
Base/Top Cover Assembly
One base and top cover assembly is required for each
stack.
SN1731
BATTMH
BATTMH
Battery Module for housing PIM or CS (ZT) backup
batteries
Houses two pairs of batteries for protection from long
power interruption (for 3 hours).
SN-1737
IPSMJ
MC
Modular Chassis (MC) with Ringer. Each MC
supports 56 physical ports (7 LT/AP card slots).
SN1729
PIMMJ
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 90
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Installation Hardware
Equipment Name
Function
HANGER ASSEM (UL)
Wall Hanger Assembly
One HANGER ASSEM is required per PIM for Wall Mounting
installation.
19 INCH RACK
BRACKET (A)
19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type A
One bracket is required for one PIM configuration.
One bracket is required for the top PIM of multiple module
configuration.
19 INCH RACK
BRACKET (B)
19-inch Rack Mounting Bracket Type B
One bracket is required for the bottom module of multiple
module configuration.
MOUNTING BRACKET
Safety Mounting Bracket
Used as an overhead hanger for Floor Standing Installation.
Wire, chain or eyebolts are to be locally provided, to secure
the bracket. To be installed on the top PIM in four or more
modules of stack. It provides 1.1G shockproof construction.
I/F BRACKET ASSEM
Inter Frame Bracket Assembly
Used to joint the frames in two-frame configuration, for Floor
Standing Installation.
BASE TRAY ASSEM
Base Tray Assembly
One BASE TRAY is required per one frame for Floor Standing
Installation of Stationary Equipment.
RACK MOUNT KIT (U)
For DM (E) Modular Chassis - Two 19” rack-mounting ears,
quantity two 1” ears. One set is included with System
Package and each Expansion Module.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 91
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
System Power
Abbrev
Name Code
Remarks
AC/DC PWR
Main Power Supply Card: One card is pre-installed per PIM.
Input: AC120 V/240 V (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Output: –27 V (4.4 A), +5 V (7.2 A), CR (38 mA),
+90 V (80 mA)
DC/DC PWR
Power Supply Card for Cell Station (Zone Transceiver):
Input: –24 V DC
Output: –48 V DC (1.7 A)
One card per PIM.
A maximum of 16 CS (ZTs) backed up by one card.
PN-PW00
EXTPWR
Power Supply Card for DESKCON:
• Provides –48 V DC power.
• A maximum of four cards per frame (4PIMs).
A maximum of three cards per PIM.
• Occupies two physical slots width per card.
PW131
PZ-PW131
For DM (E) Modular Chassis - Main Power Supply without
Generator and Message Waiting. One is included in each PIMMJ.
PW139
PZ-PW139
For DM (E) Modular Chassis - Ring Generator Unit (RGU) mounts
on top of the PZ-PW131. One is included in each PIMMJ.
Ring Voltage: 85/75Vac; Ring Current: 0.05A
PZ-PW121
PZ-PW122
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 92
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Common Control Cards
Abbrev
Name Code
Remarks
MP
SPN-CP24D
MP
SPN-CP27B
MP
PN-CP31-E
Main Processor Card
Provides LAN control function, system-based Device Registration
Server (DRS), built-in FP, Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR on
RS-232C, built-in SMDR on IP, built-in PMS on IP, Virtual IPT,
Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB, Flash
ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH × 1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB sender,
Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode), two RS-232C
ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum 128 seconds),
DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance (33.6
Kbps), Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface. BUS interface functions
as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing
and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
Supports MP Program Download (FTP download for stand alone
mode only).
One card is required per system.
Main Processor Card for Backup CPU system
Provides LAN control function, system-based Device Registration
Server (DRS), Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR on RS-232C,
built-in SMDR on IP, built-in PMS on IP, Virtual IPT, Virtual CSH,
33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory
(SDRAM 32 MB, Flash ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH × 1024CH),
16-line CFT, PB sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source
mode), two RS-232C ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration:
Maximum 128 seconds), DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for
remote maintenance (33.6 Kbps), Music-on-Hold tone, BUS
interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various
signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay timing, monitors
I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
Two cards are required per Backup CPU system. One card for
active MP [MP0] and another card for stand by MP [MP1].
Main Processor Card (DML)
Provides LAN control function, System-based Device Registration
Server (DRS), built-in FP, Virtual FP, built-in OAI, built-in SMDR on
RS-232C, built-in SMDR on IP, built-in PMS on IP, Virtual IPT,
Virtual CSH, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32 MB, Flash
ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH×1024CH), 16-line CFT, PB sender,
Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode), two RS-232C
ports, 2-line DAT (Recording duration: Maximum 120 seconds),
DK, 4-line PB receiver, Modem for remote maintenance (33.6
Kbps), internal Music-on-Hold tone, BUS interface.
BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various signals,
adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus
and PCM BUS, MP Program Download (FTP). One card is
required per system.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 93
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Common Control Cards (Cont.)
Abbrev
Name Code
MP
PN-CP31-D
ETHER
PZ-M606-A
FP
PN-CP15
ETHER
PZ-M697
(for DML)
FP
PN-CP33
(for DML)
Remarks
Main Processor Card (DMR)
Provides LAN control function, System-based Device Registration
Server (DRS), built-in FP, 33 MHz PCI BUS, Memory (SDRAM 32
MB, Flash ROM 9 MB), TDSW (1024CH × 1024CH), 16-line CFT,
PB sender, Clock, 2-line PLO (receiver mode/source mode), one
RS-232C port, 4-line PB receiver, internal Music-on-Hold tone,
BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of
various signals, adjusts gate delay timing, cable delay timing,
monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
Supports MP Program Download (FTP download for stand alone
mode only).
One card is required per system.
Ethernet Control Card
Mounted on MP card to accommodate the Ethernet and
transmit/receive a signal of TCP/IP protocol. Provides Auto
Negotiation function.
• Set to ON/OFF by the office data setting
[For Series 3400 software or later]
10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly
to this card.
Firmware Processor Card
Provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768 KB), and intermodule BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver
of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay
timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS. When the system consists
of three PIMs or more, one each of this card is mounted
respectively in PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
Ethernet Control and inter-module BUS interface Card Mounted on
PN-CP31-E card to accommodate the Ethernet and
transmit/receive a signal of TCP/IP protocol.
Provides Auto Negotiation function.
– Set to ON/OFF by the office data setting.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to
this card. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various
signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay timing, monitors
I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
Occupies two physical slots width per card on PN-CP31-E card.
Firmware Processor Card
Provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768 KB), and intermodule BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver
of various signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay
timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS. When the system consists
of three MCs or more, one each of this card is mounted
respectively in the MP slot of MC2, MC4, and MC6.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 94
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards
The following table shows a summary of the Line/Trunk (LT) cards for UNIVERGE NEAX 2000
IPS. The LT cards may be installed in slot 00 to 11 of PIM 0-7, with the following conditions.
• Maximum 64 ports per PIM
Abbrev
LC
DLC
Name Code
Ports
Remarks
PN-8LCAK
8
PN-8LCAD
8
PN-4LLCB
4
PN-AUCA
2
PN-8DLCP
8
PN-8DLCL
8
PN-4DLCT
4
8-line Analog Line Circuit Card for Single Line
Telephones
Loop resistance : Maximum 600 Ω
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary
open, Line Test functions for each circuit.
8-line Analog Long Line Circuit Card for Single Line
Telephones; Provides Caller ID Display on analog
station.
Loop resistance: Maximum 600 Ω
Provides Message Waiting Lamp control, momentary
open functions for each circuit.
4-line Analog Long Line Circuit Card for Single Line
Telephones; Provides Caller ID Display on analog
station.
Loop resistance for PB/DP type:
PB : Maximum 1200 Ω
DP (20 PPS) : Maximum 1700 Ω
DP (10 PPS) : Maximum 2500 Ω
Including the internal resistance of the distant office
equipment Provides Message Waiting Lamp control,
momentary open/reverse functions for each circuit.
PZ-PW122 is required.
2-Line Long-Line card provided with the Power
Failure Transfer (PFT) function.
Used as 2-Line LLC with PFT or 2-Line DID
Loop Resistance: MAX.2500ohms (LLC)
Two Reverse Circuits Included
On-Board Power (-48VDC) included
8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/E/III,
DSS Console, ATTCON, DESKCON
[–27 V version, 2-wire type]
8-line Digital Line Circuit Card for Dterm Series i/E/III,
Dterm Series IPK/Elite/Electra Pro, DSS Console,
ATTCON, DESKCON
[–27 V version, 2-wire type]
4 Circuit Digital Line Card (-48V), used for Dterm
Series E and Series i Terminals. PZ-PW122 Power
Supply Required to provide Long Line function.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 95
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards (Cont.)
Abbrev
ILC
Name Code
SPN-2ILCC
Ports
8
COT
PN-8COTS
8
PN-8COTQ
8
DID
PN-4DIDA
4
ODT
PN-4ODTA
4
IP PAD
PN-8IPLA
8
PZ-24IPLA
24
Remarks
2-line ISDN Line Circuit Card
Provides a physical interface to ISDN Terminals.
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
8-line Central Office Trunk Card
(Loop Start/Ground Start Trunk)
Provides loop detection, sending/detecting ground on
Tip/Ring wire.
8-line Central Office Trunk Card
(Loop Start Trunk)
Provides loop detection, receiving/sending the Caller
ID (CLASS SM) signal. µ-law only.
4-line Direct Inward Dialing Trunk Card
Provides loop detection, sending reverse signal and
PB to DP signal conversion.
Equipped with –48 V DC-DC on-board power supply.
4-Line Out Band Dialing Trunk Card
Used as either a 2-wire E&M trunk or a 4-wire E&M
trunk.
Maximum 4 cards per PIM.
When it accommodates in the LT08 to LT11 slots of
the PIM, connect speech line circuits 2 and 3 with the
CN1 connector on the front side of the card.
8-channel IP-PAD Card
Provides LAN Interface, Packet
Assembly/Disassembly to accommodate Legacy
Line/Trunk interface. And provides voice compression
DSP control functions such as voice compression
control, DTMF relay and FAX relay.
• Voice compression protocols: G.711 (64 kbps),
G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps/6.3 Kbps), G.729a (8 Kbps)
• FAX protocol: Pass-through (G.711, G.726)
Provides Auto Negotiation function.
• Set to ON/OFF by the switch setting
When mounting 24DSP (PZ-24IPLA) card, this card
can provides up to 32-channel of IP-PAD (When
using G.723.1, provides up to 24-channel of IP-PAD).
Two cards can be accommodated per built-in FP/FP
card, maximum 8 per system.
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is
connected directly to this card.
24-channel DSP Card for 8-channel IP-PAD Card
Provides Packet Assembly/Disassembly to
accommodate Legacy Line/Trunk Interface. And
Provides voice compression DSP control functions
such as voice compression control, DTMF relay same
as IP-PAD (PN-8IPLA) card.
Used to expand the IP-PAD channel up to 32channels.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 96
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Line/Trunk (LT) Cards (Cont.)
Abbrev
Name Code
8RST
PN-8RSTG
Ports
8
4RST
PN-4RSTF-A
4
DAT
PN-4DATC
8
DK00
PN-DK00
0
TNT
PN-TNTA
4
VCT
SPN-4VCTI-B
4
SPN-4VCTI-B
(H.323)
4
CSI
SPN-4CSIA
16
Optical
Modem
PN-M10
0
PFT
PZ-8PFTB
0
PZ-4PFTA
0
Remarks
8-line PB Receiver Card
Used for a PB station line, DID or tie line.
4-line Sender Card for Caller ID Display on analog
Single Line Telephones PN-4LLCB is required.
4-line Digital Announcement Trunk Card
Recording duration: Maximum 120 seconds
Occupies 8 time slots per one card.
8-circuit External Relay Control/External Key Scan
Card. Provides the above-mentioned control
functions on a per circuit basis.
2-line Tone/Music Source Interface Card
Used for BGM or Music on Hold.
Provides two jacks for an external tone/music
source.
4-channel CODEC Card for IP Trunk Card
Provides voice compression DSP control functions
such as voice compression control, DTMF relay and
FAX relay.
• Voice compression protocols: G.711 (64 Kbps),
G.723.1 (5.3 Kbps/6.3 Kbps), G.729a (8 Kbps)
• FAX protocol: T.30
Used together with IP Trunk (PN-IPTB) card.
Four cards can be accommodated per IP Trunk (PNIPTB) card, maximum 32 per system.
4-channel voice translator CODEC card for H.323
includes BUS cable. Voice compression: G729A
/G723 /G711. Up to qty 3 are used with one SPNIPTB-B (H323) to provide 12 IP Trunk Channels.
Max 3 VCT’s per each IPT, max 32 VCT’s per
system. VCT cards connect together and to IPT via
front connected bus cable. One cable is included
with each VCT card.
4-line Zone Transceiver Interface Card
Used to interface with the ZT, based on U-interface.
Maximum four ZTs can be connected per CSI card.
Occupies 16 time slots per one card.
Optical Fiber Interface Card
Provides optical fiber interface for T1/E1 Digital
Trunk Interface (1.5 M/2 Mbps)
Line length : 10 km (6.2 miles) or less
Line coding : CMI
8-line Power Failure Transfer Card
To be mounted in PFT slot of PIM.
One card per PIM.
4 Circuit Power Fail Transfer (PFT).
Mounts in each IPS DM (E) IPSMJ (includes
mounting hardware and POWER CA-PFT.)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 97
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Application Processor (AP) Cards
The AP cards may be installed in slot 00 to 11 of PIM 0-7, with the following conditions:
• Maximum 24 cards per system
• Maximum 256 ports per system
Abbrev
Name Code
SPN-DTA (PRT)-A
DTI
Ports
25
SPN-30DTC-UA
30
PRT
SPN-DTA (PRT)-A
25
CCT
SPN-DTA (CCT)-B
25
BRT
SPN-4BRTA-H
8
SIG
SPN-DTA (QSIG)-A (AP)
25
CFT
SPN-CFTC
32
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Remarks
1.5M Digital Trunk Interface
Used for either T1 or PRI. Used for T1 Interface 24 channel T1 (Max 10 T1, using 24 APTS, Max
of 240 DTI Ports); Used for ISDN PRI Trunk
Interface with D-Channel Handler for 24 channel
ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D) included (uses 25
APTS). Lower/Upper AP Hwy.
RoHS compliant
2M Digital Trunk Interface
Uses 31 Application Time Slots. Max of 120 DTI
Ports w/this Interface. AP Number 4-15 & 20-31
Lower AP Hwy Applications; 2M AMI (30ch) T1,
CCIS (30B+C) requires SPN-SC00, CCH-D (AP)
for each CCIS Link.
1.5M Digital Trunk Interface
Used for either T1 or PRI. Used for T1 Interface 24 channel T1 (Max 10 T1, using 24 APTS, Max
of 240 DTI Ports); Used for ISDN PRI Trunk
Interface with D-Channel Handler for 24 channel
ISDN Primary Rate (23B+D) included (uses 25
APTS). Lower/Upper AP Hwy. RoHS compliant
Can be used as either 24 channel CCIS span or
Common Channel Handler for CCIS used with
T1. Card is a 24 channel CCIS Interface with CChannel Handler included. 1.5M Digital Trunk
Interface using 25 Application Time Slots. Max 8
CCIS Links. Lower/Upper AP Hwy. Used for
CCIS with Point to Point T1. RoHS compliant
4 circuit Basic Rate (2B+D) Interface Trunk Card
Accommodates 4 two-channel PCM digital lines.
Both Point-to-Point and Point-to-Multi Point are
supported. Lower/Upper AP Hwy. RoHS
compliant.
QSIG combo card with Protocol Handler and
24DTAC. Supports the following Supplementary
Services (SS): SS-CLIP, SS-CLOP, SS-CLIR,
SS-CONP, SS-CNIR and SS-CONR.
Implementation of ID-SS (ETS 300 173) and
Name ID-SS (ETS 300 238) is based on basic
specifications of ETS 300 172 by ETSI at the Q
reference point between PBX’s
32 Party Digital Conference
(Group Call/Meet Me)
• Group Call Automatic
• Group Call Broad Cast
• Group Call Two Way Calling
Page 98
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Application Processor (AP) Cards (Cont.)
Abbrev
CCH
Name Code
SPN-DTA (CCT)-B
Ports
1
Remarks
Common Channel Handler for CCIS
Can be used as either Common Channel
Handler for CCIS used with T1 or 24 channel
CCIS span. Card used as Common Channel
Handler for CCIS is used with T1 and is 1 per
Destination Site, Max 8 CCIS Links. Used for
CCIS with Point to Point T1. Lower/Upper AP
Hwy.
RoHS compliant
4
D-Channel Handler (8ICH) with Flash ROM
ICH
SPN-SC03B 8ICH
Uses 4 Application Time Slots, Required for
BRI Station Side (One SC03 for every four
PN- 2ILCA cards) AP Number 4-12, Lower AP
Hwy
CSH
SPN-SC03B 8CSH-C
4
Wireless ZT Handler (CSH) with Flash ROM
Supports both S-Interface and U-Interface.
Supports Short Text Message and Dukane
Nurse Call system. Uses 4 Application Time
Slots. This card is required to expand the
number of PS from 256 to 512.
2
Provides four RS-232C ports and is used for
AP00
SPN-AP00B MRC-C
Call Accounting (SMDR) both 2400 and 1400
formats, Property Management System
(PMS), Hotel-Printer and Message Center
Interface (MCI), CCIS Centralized SMDR/MCI;
PZ-M537 expands Buffer (1600 - 27000). RS232C: Synchronous One Port, Asynchronous
Three Ports. AP Number 4-15 & 20-31 Lower
AP Hwy
SPN-AP00B MRC-H
2
Application Processor card
One AP00 card per system. Functions Include:
SMDR 2400 Format, SMDR 2400 Extended
Format, Station to Station SMDR, MCI, DND
Group, Executed Task Print Out for MP-PMS
and H/M Printer for
MP-PMS. (Does not support 1400 SMDR
format) RoHS compliant
0
Expansion Memory for AP00-B
EX MEM PZ-M537
Note 1: The Expansion Memory is the on-board sub-memory card for the AP00-B. It provides
additional memory capacity.
System Capacity
(SMDR call record)
SPN-AP00B MRC-C(AP)
SPN-AP00B MRC-H(AP)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
w/o EXPMEM
with EXPMEM
1600
27000
2620
23580
Page 99
CHAPTER 4 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
Application Processor (AP) Cards (Cont.)
Abbrev
4RST
Name Code
SPN-4RSTBA-B
Ports
4
SPN-4RSTBA-911
4
Caller
ID Class
SPN-4RSTC-A
4
IPT
SPN-IPTB-A
0
SPN-IPTB-B(AP)
(H.323)
0
SPN-AP00B DBM-C
2
SPN-SC01 DCH-Q
1
Wireless
Roaming
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Remarks
4 Circuit MF Sender for T1 ANI
Supports T1 Feature Group D (number only).
Uses 4 Application Time slots, AP Number
4-15 & 20-31 Lower AP Hwy. Max: 4-Cards
per system including PN-8RSTA/PN4RSTF/PN-4RSTG and SPN- -4RSTB911(AP).
4 Circuit MF Receiver for Enhanced 911
Requires CAMA Trunks. Uses 4 Application
Time Slots, AP Number 4-15 & 20-31 Lower
AP Hwy. Max: 4 - Cards per system
including PN-8RSTA/PN-4RSTF/PN-4RSTG
and SPN-4RSTB-B (AP).
4 Circuit FSK Receiver for Analog Trunk
CALLER ID Max: 4-Cards including RSTB
and RSTB-911AP Number 4-12, Lower AP
Hwy, Used with PN-8COTS
16 Channel IP Trunk Card.
(G.729a. Payload 40ms), VoIP P-P and
PMP. Max.1/PIM, Max 8 cards per system,
Max 127 channels per system. Has built-in
CCH supporting up to 255 nodes. Has one
RJ45 connectors for 10/100 Ethernet/Fast
Ethernet to router. Up to quantity 4 SPN4VCT are connected to one SPN-IPT.
VoIP H.323 IP Trunk card. Supports up to 12
channels. (G.729a. PAYLOAD 40ms). Also
requires CCIS and IPT key per IPTB and
NEC GK1000 software. Has one RJ45
connectors for 10/100 Ethernet/Fast
Ethernet to router. Up to quantity 3 of SPN4VCT are connected to one SPN-IPT.
Database Memory Card for WCS IP
Roaming. - Required for Wireless Roaming
and OAI applications using free Location
Facility (FLF)”, PBX receives a copy of the
database from OAI server by FLF function.
The PBX stores this database on the
SPNAP00B DBM-B card, where it can refer
to the data and convert ID codes to station
numbers. Expands number of Wireless PS
handsets to 512.
DCH Card for Wireless Roaming (Q.931.a)
1 Card per system.
Installed With PN-24DTA-A / 30DTC.
AP Number 4-15 & 20-31 Lower AP Hwy
Page 100
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Chapter 5 Feature Description
Business/Hotel Motel Features
Account Code
This feature, when used with Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR), allows station users
and Attendants to enter a cost accounting or client billing code (up to 16 digits) into the system.
Add-On Module
This feature allows the Add-On Module to be combined with a Multiline Terminal when there
are insufficient line or trunk keys provided at the Multiline Terminal. When the Add-On Module
unit keys are programmed as line/trunk keys, the additional 25 lines/trunks and the existing
lines/trunks set for the Multiline Terminal can be accessed directly (maximum of 49
lines/trunks). The station speed dialing function can be assigned for all keys on the Add-On
Module unit. Also, one of the last 3 keys can be used as a Day/ Night change key.
Alarm Indications
Faults are indicated by the Major/Minor (MJ/MN) lamps located on the AC/DC Power Supply
and, optionally, an external alarm display unit. Station Application not applicable.
Alphanumeric Display
The LCD on Multiline Terminals is used to provide alphanumeric information including
clock/calendar and call processing information. Station Application All Multiline Terminals
with an LCD display.
Analog Port Adapter
This feature allows an Analog Port Adapter unit combined with a legacy Multiline Terminal to
connect to an analog terminal such as an analog telephone, Modem, and PC with built-in
Modem. There are two communication modes for the terminal connected via the Analog Port
Adapter as shown below:
1. Single Port Mode
A Multiline Terminal and an analog terminal share the same port. In this mode, the Multiline
Terminal and the analog terminal cannot be used simultaneously.
2. Dual Port Mode
A Multiline Terminal and an analog terminal use different ports. In this mode, the Multiline
Terminal and the analog terminal can be used simultaneously.
Announcement Service
This feature allows station users to record messages on Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT)
cards. When a station user dials the feature access code for this feature, the user receives the
corresponding message from the system. Also Announcement Service can be used to provide a
voice message in the following cases;
• An incoming C.O. line/Tie line call has been transferred and encounters a busy or no
answer condition
• An incoming DID line/Tie line call has been terminated to a station and encounters a busy
or no answer condition
• Internal Recorded Message in place of Music on Hold
• Night Announcement
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 101
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Answer Key
An Answer Key is provided on all Multiline Terminals. The Answer Key can be used to answer
incoming calls on outside lines, and primary or secondary extensions. When the Answer Key is
used to answer an incoming call with a call in progress, the first party is placed on hold and the
second party is connected. If the Answer Key is depressed while in a three-party call, the user
can alternate between each party and a Broker's Call is established.
Attendant Assisted Calling
This feature allows a station user to ask an Attendant for assistance in originating a call. Three
methods are available: non-delay, delay, and passing dial tone.
Attendant Camp-on
This feature permits the Attendant to hold an incoming call in a special mode when the desired
station for the transfer is busy. The Attendant sends a Camp-On tone to the busy station. When
that station becomes idle, it is automatically alerted and connected to the waiting party.
Attendant Console
SN716 DESKCON
The Attendant Console (SN716 DESKCON) operates on a switched-loop basis with a maximum
of 6 Attendant loops terminating at each console on the associated Interface card. The Attendant
uses these loops for answering, originating, holding, extending, and reentering calls. When
Attendant loop release is used, the number of loops is effectively increased to a maximum of 12
for each console.
Attendant Called/Calling Name Display
This feature provides a display of the calling/called party's name on the Attendant Console
LCD for Attendant Called/Calling Name Display. On attendant-to-station calls, the LCD
display the name assigned to the primary extension of the station. On attendant-to-trunk
calls, the LCD displays the name assigned to the trunk route of the trunk.
Attendant Called/Calling Number
This feature provides a display of the station number and station name on the Attendant
Console during an Attendant-to-station connection. During an Attendant-to-trunk
connection, the same display shows the trunk route designation and a trunk identification
code (4 digits).
Attendant Call Selection
This feature allows assignment of keys on the Attendant Console to particular types of trunk
routes (such as WATS or FX) and particular types of service calls (such as Attendant recalls,
intercept calls, etc.). LEDs indicate the type of incoming call and pressing the associated key
allows the Attendant to answer the calls in any order.
Attendant Console Lockout - Password
This feature allows the Attendant Console to be set into a lockout mode. This disables the
console from originating or receiving calls and setting or resetting service features. To return
the Console to its manual operating condition a password is required.
Attendant Do Not Disturb Setup And Cancel
The Attendant has the ability to enter and remove individual stations from Do Not Disturb
(DND). Additionally, the Attendant can set one preassigned group of stations into, or out of,
Do Not Disturb.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 102
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Attendant Interposition Calling/Transfer
This feature allows any Attendant to directly converse with another Attendant and also
allows Attendants to transfer calls from their console to another Attendant's console in
systems where Multiple Console Operation has been provided.
Attendant Lamp Check
This function is used to check the status of keys, lamps, and LCDs mounted on the
Attendant Console to verify that various operations of the Attendant Console are functioning
normally. The check is done by a preset procedure.
Attendant Listed Directory Number
This feature provides a display of the Listed Directory Number on the Attendant Console
when the operator has answered a Listed Directory Number call.
Attendant Loop Release
This feature allows an Attendant Console loop to become available for a second call as soon
as the Attendant has directed the first call to a station, even if that station does not answer.
Attendant Programming
This function is allowed only for the Attendant Console and is used to execute DISA code
set up, speed dial programming, and system clock set up operations.
Attendant Training Jacks
The SN716 DeskCon provides two headset/handset jacks on the comnsole, for trining
operations. Normal call handling procedures apply. When jacks are used for training, both
handsets can be used for listening and talking.
Audible Indication Control
This feature allows the Attendant to adjust the volume of audible indications received at the
Attendant Console.
Call Processing Indication
This feature provides visual indications of all calls being processed or awaiting processing at
the Attendant Console.
Call Queuing
This feature provides the Attendant the ability to handle a series of exchange network calls
in the order of their arrival, (first in, first out) thereby eliminating unnecessary delays.
Call Splitting
This feature allows the Attendant to confer privately with one party on an Attendant handled
connection without the other party overhearing.
Call Waiting Display
This feature provides a visual indication to the Attendant when one or more calls are waiting
to be answered.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 103
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Common Route Indial
This feature allows assignment of incoming DID calls to different Attendant Call Selection
keys based on the last 4 digits dialed into the system. Up to eight individual Listed Directory
Numbers can be assigned in system programming. When an incoming call to any of these
trunks is received, an Attendant Call Selection key will flash and the LCD display will
indicate the Listed Directory Number associated with that trunk route.
Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS)
This feature provides a display of the company name on the Attendant Console when the
Attendant has answered a Listed Directory Number or a Tie Line call.
Incoming Call Identification
Incoming calls are identified by various means. Refer to Attendant Called/Calling Number,
Attendant Call Selection, Attendant Source Key, Attendant Listed Directory Number and
Common Route Indial Features and Specifications.
Individual Trunk Access
The Attendant Console is provided with the ability to access each individual trunk by
dialing an associated identification code. This allows detection of faulty trunks during
regular testing or after complaints. The Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) or
Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) has the capability to then busy out the trunk
until repair is made.
Multi-Function Key
This feature allows the top row of keys on the Attendant Console to perform and display
multiple functions in accordance with the status of call processing.
Multiple Console Operation
This feature allows more than one Attendant Console to operate within the same system.
Pushbutton Calling - Attendant Only
This feature permits an operator to place all calls over Dual-Tone, Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
lines from the pushbutton keypad on the Attendant Console.
Serial Call
This feature is activated by the Attendant when an incoming calling party wishes to speak
with more than one internal party. When the internal station subsequently disconnects from
the Central Office line call, the Central Office party automatically rings back to the same
Attendant.
Time Display
This feature provides a digital time display on the Attendant Console LCD. Time is
constantly displayed on the Attendant Console LCD. The clock display of the Attendant
Console is synchronized with the clock in the sysytem.
Trunk Group Busy Display
A visual indication is supplied to the Attendant when all trunks in a particular trunk group
are busy.
Unsupervised Trunk-to-Trunk Transfer By Attendant
This feature allows an Attendant to transfer an incoming or outgoing call on one trunk to an
outgoing trunk and exit the connection before the called party answers.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 104
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Attendant Delay Announcement
This feature provides an announcement, via a Digital Announcement Trunk Card, to external
calls that are not answered by the attendant within a predetermined time.
Attendant Lockout
This feature denies an Attendant the ability to reenter an established trunk or station connection
without being recalled by that station after the call is put in consultation hold.
Attendant Overflow
When an incoming call, which has terminated from a trunk to the Attendant Console, remains
unanswered after a predetermined time period, this feature provides a change to Night Service
for that particular trunk, or an overflow to an outside trunk.
Attendant Override
This feature permits an Attendant to enter a busy connection (station or trunk) using the
Attendant Console. When this feature is activated, a warning tone is sent to the connected parties
after which, they are connected with the Attendant in a three-way bridge.
Authorization Code
An Authorization Code is a numerical code which will temporarily change a station’s Class of
Service to a Class of Service assigned to that Authorization Code. This new Class of Service
allows access to trunks, dialing patterns, and/or features that would otherwise be restricted.
Automated Attendant
This feature allows the system to answer incoming trunk calls. The system will supply a message
and/or dial tone to the caller. The caller can then dial the desired extension number and be
directed to that station.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
The Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature permits incoming calls to terminate to a
prearranged group of stations. Calls are distributed in the order of arrival to idle terminals within
the group, based on which terminal has been idle the longest period of time. Stations may log
on/log off from the ACD group. Supervisor stations may monitor conversations of agents.
Busy In/Busy Out - ACD
This feature allows an agent in an ACD group to log their station onto or off of the group.
This allows the system to control whether a call directed to the pilot number of the ACD
group goes to that station or not. This prevents incoming calls from being directed to
stations at which no agent is available.
Call Waiting Indication - ACD
This feature provides a visual indication when an incoming call to an ACD group is placed
in queue, due to an “all agents busy” condition. On external relay controlled indicator or an
LED on a Multiline Terminal can be used to provide Call Waiting Indication.
Delay Announcement - ACD
This feature allows the system to provide a recorded announcement to an incoming caller
placed in queue to an ACD group. A single announcement, or two separate announcements,
can be provided.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 105
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Hunt Past No Answer - ACD
This feature allows calls targeted at an ACD group to hunt past an agent’s station, after a no
answer condition, if the agent forgets to log off of the group and the agent is unable (or not
available) to answer the call.
Immediate Overflow - ACD
This feature allows a call directed to an ACD group to immediately overflow to another
ACD group, upon encountering an “all agents busy” condition.
Priority Queuing - ACD
This feature allows the system to prioritize incoming calls by trunk route and on a per
station basis, when the call enters an ACD queue. When a call is considered as a priority, it
is placed at the beginning of the queue.
Queue Size Control - ACD
On incoming DID/Tie line calls, the system can be assigned a threshold which limits the
number of calls in queue. When the queue size threshold is exceeded, incoming callers are
connected to busy tone.
Silent Monitor - ACD
This feature provides the ACD group supervisor with the ability to monitor a call to an ACD
agent. The silent monitor function gives no indication (as an option) to either the agent or
the calling party.
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) with Management Information System (MIS)
The Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) with (MIS) provides a management information system
to be used in conjunction with the built-in ACD features of the system. The MIS incorporates a
supervisor's terminal for real-time monitoring of agent activity, amber and red alarms, and hardcopy summary reports.
Automatic Camp-on
An incoming Direct Inward Termination (DIT) call which has been terminated to a busy station
can be Camped-On automatically. When the busy station becomes idle, the station is
automatically called and connected to the camped on incoming trunk call.
Automatic Change to Daylight Saving Time
This feature allows the 2000 IPS system clock to automatically change from standard time to
daylight saving time, and vice versa. Schedule to change to/from daylight saving time is
programmed by system data programming.
Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
This feature receives the calling subscriber's number automatically sent from T1 network using
MF signaling and displays the calling number on the LCD of a Multiline Terminal and an
Attendant Console.
Automatic Recall
This feature works as a timed reminder. When a call remains on Hold, Camp-On or ringing
unanswered for a fixed interval after being transferred, the station that initiated the hold, transfer,
or Camp-On is automatically alerted.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 106
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Automatic Wake-up
This feature allows the system to be programmed to automatically call guest rooms or
administration stations at specified times. Upon answering, the guest is connected to a recorded
announcement or music source. A printout of unanswered or blocked Automatic Wake-Up
attempts for each guest room is provided using the Hotel/Motel printer.
Background Music
Background Music can be provided on a dial-up basis over legacy Multiline Terminal speakers.
Incoming voice announcements, ringing and recalls override Background Music. Up to 10 music
programs can be offered.
Back Up CPU
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides a dual CPU system with two MP cards. When Emergency
Notification from hardware is detected, the changeover from an active MP card to a standby MP
card will occur. If the active MP card becomes out of order for any reason, the standby MP card
starts up automatically. The standby MP card employs a Cold Standby System that will restart
initialization by the changeover from the active MP card.
Bandwidth Control
This feature allows assigning an available bandwidth threshold for VoIP Traffic within a
location and between locations, and to restrict Outgoing/Incoming Calls when the VoIP Traffic
exceeds the threshold. The location is a group of VoIP devices [IP Enabled Dterm, IP PAD, or
Peer-to-Peer IP Trunks (built-in IP Trunks)], that have the same VoIP communication parameter
(such as CODEC Selection List and ToS field) values assigned. When the VoIP Traffic over
CCIS exceeds the threshold, the call can be routed to Legacy Trunks (TDM Network). When
exceeding the threshold, the system can store fault information and provide external alarm
indication.
Boss / Secretary Calling
A secretary with a Multiline Terminal can use an appearance of the boss' extension to screen
calls for that extension, and announce and/or transfer calls to that extension. Additionally, the
secretary can call the boss during a busy condition and send a Message Waiting Indication to the
boss' station.
Broker's Call
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal or Single Line Telephone user to alternate between two
parties, talking to one party while the other party remains on Hold on the same line. The
Multiline Terminal user uses the TRF or ANS key to alternate between the two parties. The
Single Line Telephone user uses the Hold feature to alternate between the two parties.
Call Back
This feature allows a calling party to set an automatic Call Back when a busy or no answer
condition is encountered. When the busy station becomes idle, the station that set the Call Back
will be called. In case of Call Back no answer, the Call Back to the setting station is initiated
immediately after the called station goes on hook after making a call or accessing a feature.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 107
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding allows calls directed to a station to be routed to another station, an Attendant, an
outside number or voice mail equipment. The types of Call Forwarding provided are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Call Forwarding - No Answer
Call Forwarding - Destination
Multiple Call Forwarding - All Calls
Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Multiple Call Forwarding - No Answer
Split Call Forwarding - All Calls
Split Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Split Call Forwarding - No Answer
Attendant Call Forwarding Setup and Cancel
Call Forwarding - Override
Group Diversion
Attendant Call Forwarding Set-up and Cancel
All of the various types of Call Forwarding can be set up or canceled from both Attendant
Consoles.
Call Forwarding - All Calls
This feature allows all calls directed to a particular extension to be rerouted to an alternate
destination, regardless of the busy or idle status of the extension. Call Forwarding - All Calls
can be set by an Attendant Console, the individual station user, a Multiline Terminal with a
secondary appearance of the station's extension, or from another station (which can program
itself to be the destination of the rerouting).
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
This feature permits a call to a busy extension to be routed to a pre-designated station,
Attendant Console, or voice mail equipment. Call Forwarding - Busy Line can be set or
canceled by an Attendant Console, the individual station user, or a Multiline Terminal with a
secondary appearance of the station's extension.
Call Forwarding - No Answer
This feature reroutes calls to extensions which do not answer. These calls can be rerouted to
another station, an Attendant Console or voice mail equipment. Call Forwarding - No
Answer can be set by the individual station user, an Attendant Console, or by a Multiline
Terminal with a secondary appearance of the station's extension.
Call Forwarding - Destination
This feature allows a station (A) user to set Call Forwarding - All Calls from another station
(B) within the system, to the user's station (A).
Multiple Call Forwarding - All Calls
When a forwarded call is rerouted to a station that has also set a Call Forward, the call can be
forwarded to another station. A call can be forwarded up to a maximum of five times, as
specified in system programming.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 108
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line
This feature permits a call to a busy station to be forwarded multiple times to a designated
idle station.
Multiple Call Forwarding - No Answer
This feature permits a call to an unanswered station, the ability to be forwarded multiple
times to a designated station that does not have Call Forwarding - No Answer set or to the
Attendant Console.
Split Call Forwarding - All Calls
This feature allows all internal and external calls to a busy extension to be rerouted to
different destinations individually, regardless of the busy or idle status of the extension.
According to the type of incoming call (Station, C. O. Line, Tie Line, or a call terminated
from internal office or via CCIS); Call Forwarding or Split Call Forwarding can be selected.
Split Call Forwarding - Busy Line
This feature allows internal and external calls to a busy extension to be rerouted to separate
destinations. Destinations may be an internal station, Attendant Console, or voice mail. And
according to the type of a caller (Station/C.O. Line/Tie Line) or a call terminated from
internal office or via CCIS, Call Forwarding or Split Call Forwarding can be selected.
Split Call Forwarding - No Answer
This feature allows internal and external calls to a busy extension to be rerouted to separate
destinations. Destinations may be an internal station, Attendant Console, or voice mail. And
according to the type of a caller (Station/C.O. Line/Tie Line) or a call terminated from
internal office or via CCIS, Call Forwarding or Split Call Forwarding can be selected.
Call Forwarding – Logout (DtermIP)
This feature allows a call terminated to an IP Station in Logout Status to be forwarded to a
designated Station, Outside Number, Attendant Console or Digital Announcement Trunk
(DAT). This feature is also
applicable to the IP Stations that the LAN Cable is pulled out of or the power is off.
Call Forwarding - Override
This feature allows the call forward destination station to call the station which set call
forward. The call forward setting will be ignored.
Group Diversion
This feature allows all calls terminated to an extension that are not answered within a
predetermined time to be forwarded to a pre-designated station.
Call Park
This feature enables a station user or attendant to place a call into pre-designated Call Park
locations. The station user or attendant is then free to process other calls. This feature is available
system wide and for individual tenants.
Call Park - System
When a call is parked by Call Park-System, the call can be retrieved from Call Park by any
station in the system.
Call Park - Tenant
When a call is parked by Call Park - Tenant, the call can be retrieved from Call Park-Tenant
by any station within the tenant from which the call was originally parked.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 109
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Pickup
This feature enables a station user to answer any call directed to another station, to a station
within the user's own Call Pickup Group, or to a station within a different Call Pickup Group.
Three Call Pickup methods are available: Call Pickup - Direct, Call Pickup - Group, and Call
Pickup - Designated Group.
Call Pickup - Direct
This method permits a station user to pickup a call to any other station in the system by
dialing a specific Call Pickup feature access code and the number of the called extension.
Call Pickup - Group
This method permits a station user to answer any calls directed to other extensions in their
preset pickup group by dialing a Call Pickup - Group feature access code.
Call Pickup - Designated Group
This method permits a station user to answer an incoming call directed to another group by
dialing the Call Pick-up - Designated Group feature access code and any station within the
group to which the ringing station belongs.
Call Redirect
Without answering incoming calls or held calls that terminate to the line keys of a Multiline
Terminal, the calls can be transferred to a pre-programmed station or Voice Mail System. Two
transferring destination number can be designated per tenant, in system data programming. This
feature can be used together with the Caller ID Display feature.
Call Transfer
This feature permits a station user to transfer a call to another station in the system directly, or
with assistance from the attendant.
Call Transfer - All Calls
This feature permits a station user to transfer incoming or outgoing calls to another station
within the system without attendant assistance.
Call Transfer - Attendant
This feature permits a station user, while connected to an internal or outside call, to signal
the Attendant and have the Attendant transfer the call to another station within the system or
to an outside connection.
Caller ID Class
This feature receives the calling subscriber’s name and number sent from a public network using
a MODEM signal and displays the name or number on an LCD of a Multiline Terminal and
Attendant Console.
Caller ID Display
Without answering incoming calls or held calls which terminate to the line keys of a Multiline
Terminal, the calling party's information can be confirmed by the indications on the LCD. When
a station is in conversation and the CID display key is pressed, the following information will be
displayed on the lower line of the LCD.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 110
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Caller ID Station
This feature enables a user to connect analog telephones with Caller ID display function, and
provides the calling party’s number and name on the display without answering incoming calls.
Camp-on
This feature provides selected stations or outside calls with Camp-On capability to a busy
internal station. Two Camp-On methods are provided. The call waiting method allows a station
or an outside party to camp itself on to a busy station. The transfer method allows a transferred
outside call to be camped-on to a busy station.
Centrex Compatibility
A combination of features allows full integration of the UNIVERGE
Centrex service.
NEAX
2000 IPS with
Check In / Check Out
When this feature is activated, the following operations occur:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Check In
Room Cutoff is cleared.
Check Out
Room Status printout is supplied.
Do Not Disturb is reset.
Room Cutoff is set.
Message Waiting is reset.
Automatic Wake Up is cleared.
CID Call Back
When an Incoming Call is terminated from a Station and Trunk with Caller ID (Calling Number
Information), and the Called Station does not answer, the Calling Number is registered to the
system memory and MW Lamp is lit. After the Calling Number is registered, by operating from
a Station, Confirmation, Delete, or Call Back is available. When the Called Station answers, the
Calling Number is also registered to the Last Number Redial Memory. The Station can search
and call back to that number by the operation of the Last Number Redial/Stack Dial feature.
CID Call Routing
This feature allows designating a call terminating system based on the Calling Party Number
received from the network.
Class of Service
This feature permits all stations to be assigned a Class of Service in accordance with the degree
of system use desired. The Class of Service is used to assign restrictions for trunk access and
feature access.
Code Restriction
This feature allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to be programmed to restrict outgoing calls
according to specific area and/or Central Office codes. This restriction is controlled on the basis
of a three-digit area code or six-digit area and office code numbering plan.
Conference (Three/Four Party)
This feature provides a station user the ability to add-on another party (trunk or station) to a call
already in progress. Single Line Telephone users can add up to one additional party and
Multiline Terminal users can add up to two additional parties.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 111
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Conference (Eight Party)
This feature permits a station user or Attendant (conference leader) to establish a Conference
among as many as eight parties (including the Conference leader).
Conference (32 Party)
This feature permits a Station User (PS, Multiline Terminal, Single Line Telephone), Attendant,
or a Trunk Party to establish a Conference among as many as 32 Parties (including the
Conference Leader). Two Conference methods are available: Group Call and Meet-Me
Conference.
Group Call
This feature enables a Station User (PS, Multi-line Terminal, Single Line Telephone) within
the system or a Trunk Party to establish a Conference among as many as 32 Parties. It also
enables a Station User to page a maximum of 31 Parties simultaneously, excluding the
Conference Leader. Three Group Call methods are available: Group Call - Automatic
Conference, Group Call - Broadcasting, and Group Call - 2-Way Calling.
Group Call - Automatic Conference
This feature enables a Station User to establish a Conference among as many as 32 Parties.
From a station or Attendant, a maximum of 31 Stations/Trunks can be paged simultaneously
except the Conference Leader. The Paged Stations/Trunks are assigned to the simultaneous
Paging Groups as participants by the System Data beforehand.
Group Call - Broadcasting
This feature enables a Station User to page a maximum of 31 Parties simultaneously except
the Group Call Leader. After Paged Parties answer, the leader can speak to the Paged
Parties (the Paged Parties only hear the leader’s voice). The Paged Stations/Trunks are
assigned to the simultaneous Paging Groups as participants by the System Data beforehand.
Group Call - 2-Way Calling
This feature enables a Station User to page a maximum of 31 Parties simultaneously except
the Group Call Leader. After one of the Paged Parties answers, paging becomes 2-Way
Calling between the leader and the first answered party and automatically stops paging other
parties. The Paged Stations/Trunks are assigned to the simultaneous Paging Groups as
participants by the System Data beforehand.
Meet-Me Conference
This feature enables Station Users (PS, Multi-line Terminal, Single Line Telephone) within
the system, Attendants, or Trunk Parties to join a Conference as many as 32 Parties by
dialing a specific Access Code. The Conference participants are automatically connected to
the Conference Trunk an alert tone signals new arrivals. Conference participants may call in
at preset time or may be directed to do so by a Conference coordinator once all the
participants have joined the conference leader can lock out the conference..
Consecutive Speed Dialing
For Speed Dialing, all digits are registered as a Speed Dialing Code. In the case of Consecutive
Speed Dialing, the common portion of the number is registered as a speed calling code, and the
remaining digits of each number are dialed by each individual calling station or by using a
Station Speed Dial key on a Multiline Terminal.
Consultation Hold
This feature permits a station user to hold any incoming or outgoing CO call, tie line call, or any
intra-office call while originating a call to another station user within the system.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 112
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Customer Administration Terminal (CAT)
In addition to the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT), programming of the
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can be done from selected Multiline Terminals with LCD. The
designated Multiline Terminals can be placed in program mode, and system data can then be
changed. To prevent unauthorized changes, password levels are assigned, providing
authorization for access to certain areas of programming and denying access to others.
Data Line Security
This feature allows line circuits that are used for data transmission to be protected from
interruptions such as Attendant Camp-On, Executive Override, and Attendant Override.
Delayed Hotline
When a station user goes off-hook and waits for a certain period of time without dialing
operation, the station user is automatically routed to a specified Hotline station or an attendant. If
the station user dials a number before the preprogrammed time, the station user can make a call
as usual.
Delayed Ringing
This feature enables trunks and station lines to ring immediately at the terminating station, but
also, after a programmable period of time has elapsed, to ring at secondary Multiline Terminals
with that trunk or line appearance.
Diagnostics
To assist maintenance personnel, the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides diagnostic
capabilities such as fault code generation, device status information and alarm information
recording which can be accessed from the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) or
Customer Administration Terminal (CAT).
Dial by Name
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to search for a desired number by name. The
number and name are registered in the system and they are shown on Multiline Terminal LCD.
The Multiline Terminal user can search for the desired number by name using up or down soft
keys. When the Multiline Terminal user finds the desired number, the call can be originated by
pressing the Line/Trunk key or going off hook.
Dial Conversion
The system can be assigned to use rotary Dial Pulse (DP) or Dual Tone Multi-frequency
(DTMF) trunks and stations. This feature provides for the repeating of digits dialed by the station
user onto the C.O. trunks.
Direct Data Entry
This feature allows a maid or other hotel personnel to enter numeric data to the Property
Management System (PMS), using the guest room station for entry through dial operation. The
same numerical data can be output to a Hotel/Motel Printer by system data programming.
Direct Digital Interface
This service feature provides the capability to connect trunks from the UNIVERGE
IPS directly to T1 carrier links using either a private or public network.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
NEAX
2000
Page 113
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
This feature provides for incoming calls from the exchange network (except FX or WATS) to
reach any station within the system without attendant assistance.
DID Call Waiting
This feature allows an incoming call on a DID trunk or a tie line to automatically be
Camped-On to the destination station if the destination station is busy.
DID Digit Conversion
This feature allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to convert the digits received from the
serving C.O. to valid station numbers when the C.O. numbering plan differs from the
desired station numbering plan.
DID Name Display
This feature allows Name Assignment for a DID Number received from a Public Network,
and displays the name on an LCD of a Multi-line Terminal or Attendant Console.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
This feature allows an outside caller to access the system using an exchange network connection
without Attendant or station assistance. The outside user may originate calls over any or all of
the system's facilities such as WATS, FX, Tie Line or CCSA. The outside user can also directly
call stations and access miscellaneous trunks for such features as dictation access.
Call Forwarding set by DISA
This feature allows an outside caller to set Call Forwarding – All Calls Direct Inward
System Access (DISA) code.
Direct Inward Termination (DIT)
This feature automatically routes incoming network exchange calls directly to a pre-selected
station without Attendant assistance. The call can then be processed by the called party. Threeparty Conference, Call Transfer, etc., are handled in the same manner as any normal trunk call.
Direct Outward Dialing (DOD)
This feature permits any station user the ability to gain access to the exchange network by
dialing an access code and receiving new dial tone. The user may then proceed to dial the desired
exchange network number.
Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) Console
This feature allows a Direct Station Selection/Busy Lamp Field (DSS/BLF) Console to be
associated with a legacy Multiline Terminal. When the buttons on the DSS/BLF Console unit are
programmed for Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons, up to 60 stations can be directly
accessed in addition to those already appearing on the Multiline Terminal. Busy status for each
station is indicated by a red LED associated with each button. In addition, the DSS console can
provide the following functions:
• Message Waiting - Set/Cancel/Status Display
• Do Not Disturb - Set/Cancel/Status Display
• Automatic Wake Up No Answer - Status Display/Cancel
• Agent Busy Out - UCD - Status Display
• Line Lockout - Status Display
• Room Cutoff - Set/Cancel/Status
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 114
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Busy Out Status Console
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be
used as a Busy Out Status Console. This feature is activated by use of a Function Mode
key on a DSS/BLF Console. Busy Out Status for each station is indicated by a red LED
associated with each button.
Do Not Disturb Console
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be
used as a Do Not Disturb (DND) Console. This feature is activated by the use of a
Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF Console. DND set status for each station is indicated by
a green LED associated with each button. In addition, the Multiline Terminal user can
set/cancel the DND status of other stations using the DND Console.
Message Waiting Console
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be
used as a Message Waiting (MW) Console. This feature is activated by the use of a
Function Mode key on a DSS/BLF Console. The Message Waiting status for each station
is indicated by a green LED associated with each button. In addition, the Multiline
Terminal user can set/reset MW status using the MW Console.
Room Cutoff Console
This feature allows a DSS/BLF Console unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be
used as a Room Cutoff Console. This feature is activated by the use of a Function Mode
key on a DSS/BLF Console. The Room Cutoff status for each station is indicated by a
green LED associated with each button. In addition, the Multiline Terminal user can
set/cancel Room Cutoff to another station using the Room Cutoff Console.
Wake Up No Answer Console
This feature allows an EDW-48-2A unit associated with a Multiline Terminal to be used
as a Wake Up No Answer (WU) Console. This feature is activated by a function mode
key on a DSS/BLF Console. The No Answer status for each station is indicated by a
flashing green LED associated with each button.
Distinctive Ringing
This feature provides Distinctive Ringing patterns to the station so that the station user can
distinguish between internal and external incoming calls. This feature also enables the LED
associated with the line key of the Multiline Terminal to flash in two colors according to the kind
of incoming call.
Do Not Disturb
This feature restricts incoming calls to a station and can be set by an individual station or from
the Attendant Console. Placing a station in Do Not Disturb (DND) does not prevent a station
from originating a voice or data call or from receiving a data call. This feature also allows a
station to ensure privacy from telephone interruptions while on an outgoing call. Additionally,
the Attendant Console can place a group of stations in the Do Not Disturb condition.
Do Not Disturb – Group
This feature allows the system to schedule to set/cancel Do Not Disturb for a group of
stations at appointed time. The system has up to four patterns of timetable, and each
timetable has time to set/cancel Do Not Disturb in a day (the time is programmable by the
system). The timetable can be assigned for day of the week. The different timetable can also
be assigned for specific dates of the year.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 115
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Do Not Disturb - Hotel/Motel
This feature allows the Attendant Console(s), Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument(s), guest
stations or Property Management System (PMS) terminal(s) to place individual stations into
Do Not Disturb. Calls can be placed from stations set in DND.
Do Not Disturb-System
This feature simultaneously restricts incoming calls to a pre-assigned group of stations by
operation from the Hotel/ Motel Front Desk Instrument(s). Attendant Console(s) and
Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instruments can use the DND OVR key to override this Do Not
Disturb setting.
Dterm Assistant
Dterm Assistant is Web-based software which resides on the server and provides end users with
the ability to maintain Dterm Multi-line Terminals and the IPS telephony features (such as Speed
Dialing) from a Web-enabled PC. The Dterm Assistant operates in a client-server environment
and can manage multiple IPS systems over a Local Area Network (LAN)/Wide Area Network
(WAN).
DtermIP
DtermIP is an IP-based Multiline Terminal which provides a built-in capability of peer-to-peer
IP communications. The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS system provides the DtermIP with same IP
communications capabilities of an IP Enabled Dterm (The IP Enabled Dterm is a Dterm
Multiline Terminal with an add-on IP adapter unit).
Elapsed Call Timer
This feature provides a display of the elapsed time while a Multiline Terminal with LCD is
connected to any trunk.
Enhanced 911
This feature allows the PBX to transmit a caller’s emergency service identification information
to an Enhanced 911 Emergency system. The 911 notification is also provided to the EMG key
of a designated Attendant Console/Dterm.
Executive Calling
This feature allows a station to be assigned a VIP class. This provides special ringing to a called
station when that station is idle, and automatic sending of three tone bursts to a called station
when that station is busy, provided the call was originated from a station assigned as VIP class.
Executive Override
This feature allows selected users to override a busy condition on a called station. A warning
tone is transmitted to both stations in the busy call before the busy condition is overridden, and a
three-party Conference is then established.
External Paging with Meet-Me
This feature allows a station user or attendant dial-access to local voice paging equipment and
connects both parties automatically after the paged party has answered the page by dialing an
access code.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 116
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Fax Arrival Indicator
When a call from a C.O. line (Direct-Inward-Termination, Direct-Inward-Dialing, Automated
Attendant), station or tie line has terminated to a facsimile machine, a related lamp on a predesignated Multiline Terminal is caused to light, indicating reception of a facsimile call.
FAX over IP
This feature allows the system to transmit facsimile communications over IP network, via Local
Area Networks (LAN) and corporate Wide Area Network (WAN). Since PBX regards facsimile
equipment as one of ordinary telephones, IP Packet Assembler/Disassembler (IPPAD) and Voice
Compression Trunk (VCT) are required for facsimile uses over IP network same as legacy
stations. The facsimile transmission procedure (T.30 or G.711/G.726 pass-through) is supported
with IP-PAD/VCT.
Feature Activation from Secondary Extension
This feature allows the Multiline Terminal user to access an appearance of another extension and
program certain features from that extension.
Flexible Line Key Assignment
Multiline Terminals can have any desired line-key assignment. This feature permits assignments
to be tailored to each individual's needs. (The terminal's primary extension line appearance is the
only line key that cannot be reassigned.)
Flexible Numbering Plan
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS has a Flexible Numbering Plan. All access codes and station
numbers and can be assigned in system programming. Refer also to the Single Digit Dialing
Features and Specifications, which further increases the flexibility of the system.
Flexible Ringing Assignment
This feature allows lines on Multiline Terminals to be individually programmed to ring or not
ring.
Forced Account Code
This feature forces the user to enter an Account Code (up to 8 or 10 digits) for all outgoing calls.
The Account Code must be dialed before dialing the outgoing number. Calls are processed only
when the dialed Account Codes are valid.
Group Call by Pilot Number Dialing
This feature allows a Station User (Multi-line Terminal/Single Line Telephone/PS) or a Trunk
Party to page a group of Stations simultaneously by dialing a Pilot Number. The maximum of 32
Stations can be assigned to a Paging Group, and the Paging Group is associated with the Pilot
Number. After one of the Paged Stations answers, the paging becomes a 2-Way calling between
the Calling Party and the first answered Station and automatically stops paging other Stations.
Group Listening
When a Multiline Terminal user makes a call using the handset, pressing the SPKR key will
allow others to listen through the built-in speaker of the Multiline Terminal. The user may
continue talking on the handset at the same time.
Hands-free Answerback
This feature allows the station user to answer a voice call without lifting the handset.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 117
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Hands-free Dialing and Monitoring
This feature allows the station user to dial or monitor a call without lifting the handset.
Hold
This feature permits a user to Hold a call in progress. After Hold has been set, the station user
can make or answer new calls.
Automatic Hold
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to automatically hold a call in progress when
other line/trunk key is pressed.
Call Hold
This feature permits a user to Hold a call in progress by sending a hookflash and dialing the
Call Hold feature access code, or by pressing the Call Hold key. This line can then be used
for originating another call or returning to a previously held call.
Dual Hold
This feature permits a station user who is placed on Hold by another station to place that
station on Hold also.
Exclusive Hold
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to place a call on Hold and to exclude all other
station users from retrieving the held call.
Non-exclusive Hold
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to place a call on Hold that may be retrieved
by any station that has an appearance of the held line.
Hotel/Motel Attendant Console
The Attendant Console can be programmed to function as a Hotel/Motel Attendant Console. In
addition to the business features and functions of the Attendant, the Hotel/Motel Attendant
Console can set Room Cutoff (individual and group), Automatic Wake Up, Message Waiting,
and Do Not Disturb (individual and group).
Hotel/Motel Front Desk Instrument
A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be programmed to function as a Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front
Desk Instrument. This can be used to set and cancel standard H/M features such as Message
Waiting, Do Not Disturb, Automatic Wake Up, and Room Cutoff.
Hotline - Inside/Outside
This feature causes the terminal to place a call to another station or to an outside party
automatically when the user selects the Hotline extension.
House Phone
This feature allows selected stations to reach the Attendant simply by going off-hook.
Individual Attendant Access
This feature permits a user to call a specific Attendant by dialing an Attendant call code.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 118
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Intercept Announcement
This feature provides the automatic interception of Direct Inward Dialing (DID) and Tie Line
calls which cannot be completed due to unassigned station or level. The caller hears a recorded
Intercept Announcement that informs the caller that an inoperative number was reached, and
may supply the number for information.
Intercom
Three types of Intercoms are available: Manual Intercom, Automatic Intercom, and Dial
Intercom. Each type of Intercom provides access to a small group of Multiline Terminals with
simplified calling methods.
Manual Intercom
The Manual Intercom groups have up to six Multiline Terminals sharing a common signal
path. Users can call other members of the Manual Intercom group by pressing a Manual
Intercom key; each press sends a tone burst over the speakers of all the terminals in the
group. When another user answers the call, a speech path is activated.
Automatic Intercom
Automatic Intercom provides a path for Voice Announcement Calls with Handsfree
Answerback between two Multiline Terminals using a line key. Private conversations can be
held by using the Multiline Terminal handsets. The Busy/Idle status of the associated
Multiline Terminal is displayed on the Automatic Intercom line key LED.
Dial Intercom
Dial Intercom comprises up to 10 Multiline Terminals which can call each other using a
dedicated Dial Intercom line key with abbreviated dialing. Dial Intercom calls can be Voice
Announce with Handsfree Answerback or ringing calls.
Internal Tone/Voice Signaling
Multiline Terminals can signal incoming internal calls by Voice Announcement or by ringing
according to the programmed mode (Voice first or Ring first) of the called terminal. The caller
can dial the digit 1 to change from Voice Announcement to Ring Tone or vice versa. The
Multiline Terminal assigned this feature can program the following two modes:
• Voice Mode: allows an incoming call to terminate with Voice Announcement.
• Tone Mode: allows an incoming call to terminate with ringing.
Internal Zone Paging with Meet-Me
This feature allows the Attendant Console and system users to page over the built-in speakers of
the Multiline Terminals within the assigned zone or all zones.
IP Enabled Dterm
This feature provides a Dterm Series E/Series i terminal, if equipped with an IP adapter unit with
a capability to provide a converged infrastructure at the desktop, with a 10Base-T/100Base-TX
Ethernet connection to corporate Local Area Networks (LAN). The IP Enabled Dterm can
communicate with other IP Enabled Dterm and CCIS network (IP based) on a peer-to-peer
connection basis. And, the IP Enabled Dterm also communicates with legacy stations and trunks
(TDM based) via IPPAD (IP Packet Assembler/Disassembler). The IP Enabled Dterm provides
users with all features currently available in Dterm Series E/Series i terminals.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 119
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Last Number Redial
This feature allows users to redial the last station-to-station or outside number they dialed using
a feature access key or a feature access code. This is useful when the called station is busy or
does not answer.
Least Cost Routing - 3/6 Digit
This service feature allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to be programmed to route outgoing
calls over the most economical facility (WATS, FX, DDD). Based on the individual area code
and office code dialed (6-digit analysis), the system examines the programmed tables and uses
the trunk in the order specified.
Line Lockout
This feature automatically releases a station from the common equipment if the station remains
off-hook for longer than a programmed interval before dialing. Howler tone may be programmed
to be sent to the station in Line Lockout.
Line Pre-selection
This feature provides the station user with two ways to select an idle, held, recalling, or ringing
line before going off-hook.
Maid Status
This feature allows the Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument, Property Management
System (PMS) terminal, or guest room station (using special access code) to register the
condition of each guest room.
Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT)
The Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) is a personal computer that provides an
interface to the PBX via the system’s CPU card. The MAT PC must have the MATWorX
program properly installed to communicate with the PBX. MATWorX is required for system
software registration and activation. MATWorX is a Graphical User Interface (GUI) program
that provides an efficient method to manipulate the PBX database. This program contains
extensive help files, Usage Wizards and Tool Tips, with hyperlinks imbedded in the text. The
hyperlinks provide quick access to the appropriate Add-In modules. Add-In modules provide a
user friendly intuitive method to customize the PBX database.
Message Center Interface (MCI)
This feature provides an interface with a customer supplied Voice Mail System (VMS) that can
send Message Waiting lamp control data to the system. The Message Center Interface (MCI)
can provide the following operations:
1. When terminating the call to the VMS, the system sends call connection status
information to the VMS through the MCI.
2. The VMS sends the Message Waiting Lamp on data to the MCI.
3. The system, upon receiving this control data from the MCI, illuminates the Message
Waiting lamp of the corresponding station.
4. The VMS, upon receiving retrieved message information, will send the Message Waiting
lamp control data requesting the system to extinguish the Message Waiting lamp of the
corresponding station.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 120
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Message Registration
This feature provides output from the system to a call accounting system using an RS-232C
connector. This allows the Hotel/Motel clerk to retrieve the information needed to charge for
local and toll calls.
Message Reminder
This feature allows a user or Attendant to turn on the message waiting (MW) lamp of a Single
Line Telephone, or the Message Reminder (MSG) LED of a Multiline Terminal (if assigned).
Message Waiting
Message Waiting – Single Lamp
This feature allows the Attendant Console, Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument,
administrative station, Voice Mail System (VMS) or Property Management System (PMS)
terminal to light a lamp (on an uninterrupted or interrupted basis) on a Single Line
Telephone or Multiline Terminal to indicate a message is waiting.
Message Waiting – Multiple Lamp
This feature allows the Attendant Console, Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument,
administrative station, Voice Mail Systems (VMS) or Property Management System (PMS)
terminal to light multiple line keys on a Multiline Terminal, to indicate a message is waiting.
This allows multiple individuals who share the same Multiline Terminal to receive their own
Message Waiting indication.
Voice Message Waiting
In addition to the lamp indication control, this feature also provides the Voice Message
Waiting service that an originating station user can set the Message Waiting with a recorded
message by using the Digital Announcement Trunk (DAT) card.
• Voice Message Waiting – System
An originating station user can choose the recorded message to be set by dialing the
message number associated. The messages are recorded by the predetermined station.
• Voice Message Waiting - Individual
When setting Message Waiting, an originating station user announces the message to
be recorded after dialing the station number.
Miscellaneous Trunk Access
This feature allows the connection of various types of external facilities. In addition to Loop and
Ground Start Trunks, the following can also be interfaced with the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS:
CCSA Lines Code Calling Equipment, Dictation Equipment, Foreign Exchange (FX) Lines,
Radio Paging Equipment, and Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) lines. Refer to separate
features, Direct Inward Dialing (DID), and Tie Line Access for more applications of
Miscellaneous Trunk Access.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 121
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
CCSA Access
This feature allows connection to or from a CCSA (Common Control Switching
Arrangement) network. A CCSA network is a special, privately-leased network constructed
for one customer's exclusive use that replaces or augments the public switched network
services. The outgoing connections using CCSA lines are accomplished in the same manner
as a normal outgoing call. Incoming calls are received from the CCSA network as a series
of digits from the network instead of a ringing signal, and the connection is established in
the same manner as a Direct Inward Dial (DID) or Tie Line connection. For Tie Line
applications, the customers can construct a network with their own numbering plan. In a
CCSA application, the numbers are issued by the C.O. following the CCSA network
numbering plan.
Code Calling Equipment Access
Code Calling Equipment consists of external paging units and external dialers requiring dial
access from the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS.
Dictation Equipment Access
This feature permits dial access to customer provided Dictation Equipment, and in some
instances allows them to maintain telephone dial control of normal dictation system features.
Foreign Exchange (FX) Access
An FX line is a line that is extended and terminated at a distant Central Office. With this
feature, outgoing calls over the FX line become a local call at the distant C.O.
Radio Paging Equipment Access
This feature provides station users dial access to Radio Paging Equipment, and to selectively
tone - or voice/ tone-alert individuals carrying pocket paging devices. The paged party
(when on premises) can be connected to the paging party by going to the nearest station and
dialing an answer back code.
Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) Access
This feature allows any station user direct dial access to outgoing WATS lines.
Mobility Access
2000 IPS supports Mobility Access (MA) feature including enquiry calls and
activation/deactivation by a user. This feature allows a user to make/receive telephone calls
from a remote location such as a cell phone via the PBX, as if the user is making and receiving
calls from his/her desk phone.
Modem over IP
This feature allows the system to transmit modem communications over IP network, via Local
Area Networks (LAN) and corporate Wide Area Network (WAN).
MP Program Download
NEAX 2000 IPS provides Online MP Program Download via IP network. The IPS downloads
the MP upgrade program from FTP server using MATWorX IPS. Immediate or scheduled
changeover to the upgrade program is available. It is also possible to change back to the previous
program that was in use before the changeover (changeback).
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 122
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Multiple Language Display
A language displayed in the LCD of a Multiline Terminal and Attendant Console can be selected
on a per-station basis or on a per-operator console basis. The available languages are the same as
used on a system-wide basis.
Multiline Terminal Attendant Position
A Multiline Terminal with LCD can be programmed to function similar to an Attendant position.
This Attendant position has limited access to Attendant related features and functions and can be
substituted where an Attendant is required but an Attendant Console is not necessary. When a
DSS/BLF console unit is associated with this Attendant Multiline Terminal enhanced operation
is available.
Music on Hold
This feature plays music when a line is placed on hold. Music is provided by a circuit board
memory chip, IP adpter, or a local music source, such as a CD player or a radio.
Night Service
This feature provides a variety of methods for handling incoming calls when the system is in
night mode. These include:
• Attendant Night Transfer
• Call Rerouting
• Day/Night Mode Change by Attendant Console
• Day/Night Mode Change by Station Dialing
• Night Connection-Fixed
• Night Connection-Flexible
• Trunk Answer Any Station
Attendant Night Transfer
When the Attendant Console is in Night Service, any operator directed calls (dial 0 calls) are
automatically routed to a preprogrammed station. Priority Calls and Off-Hook Alarms which
terminate to an Attendant are also routed by this feature.
Call Rerouting
This feature provides flexible reroute capabilities for a variety of calls when the system is in
night mode.
Day / Night Mode Change by Attendant Console
This feature provides activation of DAY/NIGHT Mode Change by depressing a
predetermined key from the Attendant Console.
Day / Night Mode Change by Station Dialing
This feature allows selected stations to activate a change from day mode to night mode by
dialing a special code.
Day/Night Mode Change by System Clock
This feature provides automatic activation of Day/Night Mode Change by using System
Clock.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 123
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Night Connection - Fixed
This feature allows incoming calls normally terminated to the Attendant to reroute to a
predetermined station when the system is placed in Night Service.
Night Connection - Flexible
This feature provides incoming calls normally terminated to the fixed night station to be Call
Forwarded to another station.
Trunk Answer Any Station (TAS)
This feature allows any station, other than one with incoming restrictions, to answer
incoming calls when the system is in the night mode. When this feature is activated,
incoming exchange network calls will activate a common alert signal at the customer
premises. By dialing a specified code, any station may answer the call and then extend it to
any other station by means of the Call Transfer feature.
Overflow for TAS Queue
If the TAS Call is not answered by predetermined time, the call will be forwarded
to predetermined Station/Attendant Console/Announcement Service.
Queue Limit for TAS
When a DID Call is converted to TAS and the number of used Lines reaches queue limit,
this feature provides the system to restrict the next call terminating.
No CID Call Routing
This feature allows designing a call terminating system based on the reason for absence of
calling party number received from the network.
Off-hook Alarm
This feature allows a station user to call the Attendant, or a pre-designated station, by simply
staying off-hook for a preprogrammed period of time. The calling number is automatically
displayed at the Attendant Console, or the pre-designated station if equipped with an LCD.
Off-Premises Extensions
This feature allows the connection of a single line telephone in an off-premises location. The
connection to the Off-Premises Extension can be through direct copper or through the local
telephone company.
Open Application Interface (OAI)
Provides a computer-to-PBX interface, allowing a computer to control the function of the
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS. The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can be customized to
accommodate most customer applications. Application software can be provided by NECAM, an
outside software house, or a customer.
Pad Lock
This feature temporarily restricts telephones from making unauthorized calls by dialing special
access code when station users are away from their seats.
Periodic Time Indication Tone
This feature provides a periodic tone to the station user who has made an outgoing call. This
feature can be allowed or denied for each station.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 124
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Pooled Line Access
A line key can be assigned to access Pooled Lines. Each line key will allow incoming, outgoing,
or both-way access to a trunk route.
Power Failure Transfer
This feature provides for specified trunks to be automatically connected to designated Single
Line Telephones in the event of AC power loss. It is normally used when the system is not
equipped with reserve power.
Priority Call
This feature allows the Attendant to answer a call before other calls, at the Attendant's discretion.
Privacy
This feature restricts Multiline Terminal users from depressing a busy line button and entering a
conversation unless permitted by the Multiline Terminal user currently on that line button or if
the line button is assigned for Direct Privacy Release.
Direct Privacy Release
This feature allows a station user with a secondary appearance of another extension in the
system to access that extension when it is being used by someone else. This feature allows
for a simplified method for establishing a conference. In addition, this feature can be used to
emulate PC dialing, where a single line extension connected to a PC can appear on a
Multiline Terminal and be accessed by the Multiline Terminal user after the PC is completed
dialing.
Manual Privacy Release
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to enter a conversation on a busy line button if
the Multiline Terminal user already in the conversation allows them by releasing Privacy.
Private Lines
Only a C.O. trunk assigned to that specific station is seized when a station user originates an
outgoing C.O. call or when an incoming C.O. call is terminated at the station designated by
Direct-In-Termination. In this manner, stations and C.O. trunks are to be associated on a 1-to-1
basis.
Property Management System Interface
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides a data interface to a locally provided Property
Management System (PMS). This enables communication between the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000
IPS and the PMS in order to provide computer control of Hotel/ Motel features.
Proprietary Multiline Terminal
There are five Multiline Terminals that can be used with the system.
• Dterm Series i
• Dterm Series E
• IPK/Electra Elite
Automatic Idle Return
This feature returns a station to the idle state after 3 seconds of reorder tone is received due
to the distant end disconnecting.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 125
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Called Station Status Display
This feature provides a display on the status of a called station on the LCD of the calling
Multiline Terminal.
Calling Name and Number Display
This feature provides a display on the LCD of the Multiline Terminal receiving a call,
indicating the station number or trunk number of the incoming call.
Dynamic Dial Pad
This feature allows to make an outgoing call at first hand by pressing a ten key of Multiline
Terminal, without pressing a Speaker key or going off-hook.
Group Fearture Key
This feature provides the multiple line keys of Multiline Terminal with DSS/BLF function.
A station user can monitor the status of group member stations such as idle, busy, hold and
ringing by lamp indication of the multiple line keys. If a line is idle, a station user can make
a call to the member station by pressing the associated line key (instead of pressing DSS
key). If a line is ringing or is on hold, a station user can pick up the incoming call or the call
on hold by using My Line, and the ringing or held line is made idle.
Handsfree Unit
The built-in Handsfree Unit enables full Handsfree operation for both internal and external
calls (No optional Handsfree Unit is required).
I-Hold / I-Use Indication
Multiline Terminals provide indication of which line keys have been placed on Hold, or are
in use by that Multiline Terminal. The LED associated with the line key will give the
appropriate indication.
Microphone Control
All Multiline Terminals are equipped with a Microphone Control button with an associated
LED.
Multiple Line Operation
This feature allows for the appearance of multiple lines on the Flexible Line Keys and
feature keys of all Multiline Terminals.
Mute Key
This feature allows the distant extension user, of a station user that presses a mute key during
conversation, not to hear the station user's voice though the station user can hear the distant
extension user's voice. By pressing the mute key again, the mute status returns to original
conversation.
My Line Number Display
This feature enables a Multiline Terminal to display My Line (Primary Extension) number
on the LCD during the Multiline Terminal in idle state.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 126
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Preset Dialing
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to prepare and verify a number in the display
on the LCD before dialing. When a wrong number is entered, the user can correct the
number before originating the call.
Prime Line Pickup
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to go off hook and originate a call from the
line assigned as the Prime Line without depressing the associated line key.
Recall Key
Each Multiline Terminal is equipped with a Recall Key that is used to generate a hookflash
to access features provided by the outside exchange, or to abandon a call while retaining the
line for origination of another call.
Relay Control Function Key
This feature provides a Multiline Terminal with the ability to activate/deactivate relays (on a
PN-DK00) to control external devices.
Ring Frequency Control
The ring frequency of the Multiline Terminal can be controlled on a station basis in system
programming (14 frequencies are available) or by use of a function key on the Multiline
Terminal.
Ringing Line Pickup
This feature provides the ability to answer any call ringing into a Multiline Terminal by just
lifting the handset.
Soft Keys
According to the status of the Multiline Terminal, function keys (Soft Keys) are displayed in
the third line on the LCD. If the status of Multiline Terminal changes, the Soft Keys will
change automatically. Also if the Help key is pressed, explanation of indicated Soft Keys are
shown on the LCD.
Volume Control
Multiline Terminals are equipped with common Volume Control keys for:
• Built-in Speaker / Handset Receiver Volume.
• Ring Volume.
• C.O. Transmission Level.
• LCD contrast.
• Ring Tone Frequency
The Volume Control keys are located on the lower front side of Multiline Terminals (UP
and DOWN).
Remote Hold
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to hold it on the line button of transferred terminal,
by pressing the Hold key.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 127
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Remote PIM over IP
When IPSDMR and 2000 IPS PIM are installed at remote site, and connected to a 2000 IPS or
IPSDM at main site over IP network, the Main Site system controls and maintains the IP Remote
PIM operation as one single system. If a communication failure occurs between the Main Site
and Remote Site, the Remote Site automatically changes over to a survival mode and operates as
a stand-alone system.
Reserve Power
This feature provides backup power from a 24V battery source in the event of a commercial
power failure.
Resident System Program
This feature provides the installers a simple procedure to have the system generate system data
according to the system hardware configuration, thereby providing immediate operation and
shorter programming time. When activated, the system scans hardware configuration (such as
line/trunk card slot location) and assigns system data (such as extension numbers, trunk
numbers, etc.) according to a predetermined generic program assignment.
Return Message Schedule Display
This feature permits any station user to register his Return Schedule from his phone when he
leaves his desk or the premises, and have the Return Schedule displayed on a calling Multiline
Terminal with a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) during his absence.
Room Cutoff
This feature allows the following types of terminals to temporarily restrict guest room telephones
from making unauthorized calls when guests are away from their rooms. This feature allows the
same restriction when the rooms are in Check Out status:
•
•
•
•
Attendant Console
Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument
Property Management System (PMS) terminal
Guest room telephones using a special access code
There are two types of Room Cutoff conditions depending on the type of calls restricted.
• External Call Restriction: All outgoing calls from guest room stations are restricted in the
Room Cutoff status. (Only internal calls are available.)
• Toll Call Restriction: All toll calls from guest room stations are restricted during Room
Cutoff status. (Internal and local calls are available.)
Room Status
This feature provides the Hotel/Motel (H/M) Front Desk Instrument with a visual display of the
guest's room status. A supplementary print out (individual and summary) can be provided.
Route Advance
This feature automatically routes outgoing calls over alternate facilities when the first choice
trunk group is busy. Users select the first choice route by dialing the corresponding access code,
and the equipment then advances through alternate trunk groups only if the first choice is busy.
Save and Repeat
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal to save a specific dialed number and then redial that
number at a later time.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 128
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Security Alarm
This feature provides an indication on the Attendant Console when a contact closure occurs.
Semi-Automatic Attendant Camp-On
This feature permits the Attendant to hold an incoming call in a special mode when the desired
station for the transfer is busy. The Attendant sends a Camp-On tone to the busy station. When
that station becomes idle, the Attendant is recalled automatically. After the Attendant answers
the recall, the station is called automatically. When the station answers the Attendant call and the
attendant releases, the station is automatically connected to the waiting party.
Set Relocation
This feature enables two stations to be moved from one location to another without
reprogramming station data at MAT.
Single Digit Dialing
This feature provides the station user the ability to dial single digit codes to access certain
features while still allowing the same digit dialed to be used as the first digit of guest room
station numbers.
Single Digit Feature Access Code
This feature allows stations to access certain other system features by the direct dialing of a
Single Digit Access Code, while receiving Busy Tone or Ringback Tone.
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a standard protocol for TCP/IP network
management, which enables a network management application software to query a management
agent (network device such as router, PC host, and hub) using a supported MIB (Management
Information Base). The MIB is a database of network performance information that is stored on
the network devices. The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can support the SNMP standard MIB
(MIB-II, defined in IETF RFC 1213) and private MIB and TRAP. This feature also enables the
network management system (SNMP manager) to manage the 2000 IPS via Network Address
Translation (NAT).
Software Line Appearance (Virtual Extensions)
This feature permits assignment of circuits which do not physically exist, to be used as
secondary extensions on Multiline Terminals. There are 1020 software lines (minus the number
of Dterms and DtermIP) that can be assigned to line keys and used as desired.
Stack Dial
This feature enables a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console to remember the numbers
dialed in the preceding five calls, including the last number dialed. The stack dial numbers are
sequentially displayed on the LCD display, thus allowing the station user to make an outgoing
call by selecting the desired dialed number from the display.
Station Hunting
Three Station Hunting arrangements are available. Station Hunting - Circular processes the call
no matter which station in the hunt group is called. Station Hunting - Terminal initiates a hunt
only when the pilot number of a hunt group is called. Station Hunting - Secretarial is initiated
when a busy secretarial station in a Station Hunting - Circular group or Station Hunting Terminal group is reached.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 129
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Station Hunting - Circular
When a busy station in a hunt group is called, this feature permits the call to be processed
automatically through the hunt group in a preprogrammed order from that station's position
within the hunt group.
Station Hunting - Terminal
When a pilot number is dialed and that number is busy, sequential Station Hunting will be
initiated. However, if a number other than the pilot number is dialed and that number is
busy, busy tone will be provided rather than initiate Station Hunting.
Station Hunting - Secretarial
This feature allows assignments to be given to members of Terminal and Circular Hunting
groups to reroute calls (when their hunting group is all busy) to a back-up hunting group.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
This feature provides a call record for outgoing station-to-trunk calls and incoming trunk-tostation calls (including Data Call). This facilitates cost control by identifying trunk use and
misuse by individual stations. Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) enables call billing to
customers and clients, and provides a means for checking local telephone bills.
Station to Station SMDR
Based on the existing feature of SMDR output, this feature enables the output of an SMDR
record for station-to-station calls (two-station connection). This output is based on the
NEAX 2400 SMDR Format and can be interfaced from the MP via RS232C, MP via
TCP/IP or AP00B MRC-F via RS232C. This feature can be enabled for SLT, Dterm, Dterm
IP, PS, or Softphone.
Station Service Status Display
This feature provides a maintenance person to know a service feature setting status for a specific
station at a glance. By entering single command, the maintenance person can see a list of service
features/station status regarding to the specific station.
Station Speed Dialing
This feature allows a station user to dial frequently called numbers by dialing an access code and
an abbreviated code, or by depressing a feature key or line key assigned for Station Speed
Dialing capability.
Step Call
This feature allows the Attendant or station user, after calling a busy station, to call an idle
station by simply dialing an additional digit. This feature will operate only if the number of the
idle station is identical to that of the busy station in all respects, except the last digit.
Supervisory Control of Peripheral Equipment
When various types of peripheral equipment (such as facsimiles, dictation equipment, Voice
Mail, etc.) are connected to the line circuits of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS, this feature
allows the loop of the line circuit concerned to open for a programmable interval, and send a
release signal to the peripheral equipment when the calling party disconnects.
System Clock Setup by Station Dialing
This feature enables a Station User to set up the System Clock, from Single Line Telephone,
Multi-line Terminal, and PS.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 130
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
System Speed Dialing
This feature provides all users the ability to dial frequently called numbers using an abbreviated
call code.
Tenant Service
This feature provides for more than one organization (tenant) to share the same UNIVERGE
NEAX 2000 IPS system. Through system programming, each organization may be restricted to its
own Central Office trunks, Attendant Consoles and extension group. In addition, incoming calls
are directed to the specific tenant.
Terminal Login via NAT
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS supports network configuration via a router with NAT. NAT
(Network Address Translation) is a technology that translates an internal local IP address to a
globally unique IP address before sending packets to the outside network. NAT is configured on
the router at the border of the inside network and the outside network. NAT is used for efficient
use of global IP addresses and for security (shield internal addresses from the public Internet).
• Remote connections of IP Enabled Dterm via NAT
- Provide communications between IP Enabled Dterm located under the same NAT.
-
Provide communications between IP Enabled Dterm located under different NAT.
Tie Lines
This feature allows any station user dial access or direct access to an E&M Tie Line.
Tie Line Tandem Switching
This feature allows trunk-to-trunk connections through the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS without
the need for any Attendant assistance or control. The major use of this feature is in association
with a dial tandem tie line network to allow tie line connections and incoming tie line calls
automatic access to, and completion of, local Central Office calls.
Timed Forced Release
This feature allows the system to restrict a long-time call to reduce phone rates for trunk calls.
For an outgoing trunk call, an incoming trunk call and a tandem call, when the preset time
elapsed, the call is released forcibly.
Timed Queue
When a user originates an outgoing trunk call and the called party is busy or does not answer, the
caller can set the Timed Queue feature. When this feature is set, the trunk seizure is repeated and
the number is redialed after a predetermined time interval.
Timed Reminder
This feature allows the system to be programmed to automatically call stations at specified
times. Upon answering, the station is connected to a recorded announcement or music source.
Trunk - Direct Appearances
This feature allows Multiline Terminal users the ability to access a CO line or E&M Tie Line
without dialing an access code. For this feature, trunks must be assigned to the line keys on the
Multiline Terminal. Incoming calls on CO lines can be answered on the appropriate trunk line
appearance.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 131
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Trunk Queuing - Outgoing
This allows a station user, upon encountering a busy signal on a trunk, to dial a feature access
code and enter a first-in, first-out queue. As soon as an outgoing trunk becomes available,
stations in the queue will be called back on a first-in, first-out basis.
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection
This feature provides any station user with the ability to conference together two outside trunk
calls and abandon the connection without dropping the Trunk-to-Trunk Connection.
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
The Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) feature permits incoming calls to terminate to a
prearranged group of stations. Calls are distributed in the order of arrival to idle terminals within
the group, based on which terminal has been idle the longest period of time. Stations may log
on/log off from the UCD group. Supervisor stations may monitor conversations of agents.
Busy In/Busy Out-UCD
This feature allows an agent in a UCD group to log their station onto or off of the group.
This allows the system to control whether a call directed to the pilot number of the UCD
group goes to that station or not. This prevents incoming calls from being directed to
stations at which no agent is available.
Call Waiting Indication-UCD
This feature provides a visual indication when an incoming call to a UCD group is placed in
queue, due to an “all agents busy” condition. An external relay controlled indicator or an
LED on a Multiline Terminal can be used to provide Call Waiting Indication.
Delay Announcement-UCD
This feature allows the system to provide a recorded announcement to an incoming caller
placed in queue to a UCD group. A single announcement, or two separate announcements,
can be provided.
Hunt Past No Answer-UCD
This feature allows calls targeted at a UCD group to hunt past an agents station, after a no
answer condition, if the agent forgets to log off of the group and the agent is unable (or not
available) to answer the call.
Immediate Overflow-UCD
This feature allows a call directed to a UCD group to immediately overflow to another UCD
group, upon encountering an “all agents busy” condition.
Priority Queuing-UCD
This feature allows the system to prioritize incoming calls by trunk route and on a per
station basis, when the call enters a UCD queue. When a call is a considered as priority it is
placed at the beginning of the queue.
Queue Size Control-UCD
On incoming DID/Tie line calls, the system can be assigned a threshold that limits the
number of calls in queue. When the queue size threshold is exceeded, incoming callers are
connected to busy tone.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 132
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Silent Monitor-UCD
This feature provides the UCD group supervisor with the ability to monitor a call to a UCD
agent. The silent monitor function gives no indication (as an option) to either the agent or
the calling party.
Uniform Numbering Plan (UNP) -Voice and Data
In the numbering plan for a network to be configured through the use of Tie Lines, a Uniform
Numbering Plan (UNP) is employed. When UNP is employed, a station user from any PBX
within the network can call a desired party by using a uniform dialing method based on the UNP.
Variable Timing Parameters
This feature gives the IPS the versatility to change timing duration using the Maintenance
Administration Terminal (MAT) or the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT). All timing
parameters are set initially in the Resident System Program. These timing parameters can be
changed according to the customer's requirements.
Voice Guide
This feature provides a station user with an announcement that informs:
1. The result of the operation when the station user set or canceled the service feature,
instead of service set tone.
2. Which service has been set to the station; such as, Call Forwarding - All Calls, Do Not
Disturb or Message Waiting, when the station goes off-hook, instead of special dial tone.
Voice Mail Integration
This feature is used to interface the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS with a locally provided standalone type Voice Mail System (VMS). The VMS, connected to the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS
single line circuit (LC), is controlled by sending/receiving DTMF signals using this LC.
The VMS’s voice mail feature can be used by accessing this VMS directly from an extension. If
a station sets its call forwarding destination to the VMS, calls to this station are connected to the
VMS, and the messages can be registered according to the VMS instruction. In addition, the
Message Waiting lamp of the station can be turned on automatically by the VMS.
Voice Mail Private Password
Voice Mail Password can be prevented from displaying in LCD of Multiline Terminals when
connected to the Voice Mail System.
Voice Mail Transfer
This feature has two functions that provide streamlined transfer access to voice mail.
1. One touch access to VMS: When an Attendant transfers an external call to a station, and
if the station is busy or unanswered, the Attendant can transfer the call to a VMS by
dialing “9” or by pressing a function key provided for this feature.
2. Transferring Camp-On call to VMS: When an Attendant sets Camp-On to a busy
destination station for an external call, and if the destination station does not answer by
predetermined time, the call can be automatically transferred to a VMS.
Voice over IP - (H.323)
Voice over IP allows the system to transmit voice conversations over a corporate Intranet using
ITUT H.323 protocol.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 133
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Voice over IP Log Collection
This feature provides Voice over IP (VoIP) log collection functions for analyzing VoIP related
problems caused by IP device, usage method, network environment and other effects. A
maintenance person will be able to understand its cause and figure out how to solve the problem.
The following functions are supported.
Call Log Collection
It enables the collected call log to be checked when the user reports a malfunction. Call log is
output to the RS port of MP card. It includes the speech time, number of sent/received
packets and number of received packets lost.
Fault Log Collection
It enables a real time check when a malfunction exists at registration or checking of
accumulated fault information by a maintenance person. Fault log is output to the RS port of
MP card. It includes reset cause and reset time, number of sent/received control packets,
number of resent control packets, number of control packets that fails to resend, number of
abnormal control packets received and number of times control sequence becomes abnormal.
Whisper Page
This feature allows a secretary to interrupt the boss in a private way. By pressing a feature key or
dialing an Access Code, the secretary station can voice override the conversation between the
boss and another party (station or trunk). When the conversation is interrupted, the boss can hear
the secretary but the other party is unaware of the Voice Override.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 134
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
CCIS Features
Attendant Camp-On With Tone Indication - CCIS
This feature permits the Attendant; when the desired station at another switching office is busy,
to hold an in-coming call in a special waiting mode. A distinctive Camp-On tone is sent to the
busy station when the Attendant sets Camp-On. When that station becomes idle, it is
automatically rung and connected to the waiting trunk party.
Attendant Controlled Conference - CCIS
This feature permits an Attendant (2400 IPX) to establish a conference, through CCIS, with up
to eight parties of stations and/or trunks (inside and outside parties).
Automatic Recall - CCIS
This service feature works as a time reminder. When an Attendant-handled call through CCIS
remains on hold, camped-on, or ringing unanswered for a fixed interval, the Attendant is
automatically alerted.
Brokerage - Hot Line - CCIS
This feature provides a ringdown connection between two stations, each using a Multiline
Terminal, in different offices in the CCIS network.
Busy Lamp Field (BLF) - CCIS
This feature provides a busy status indication of the predetermined stations within the CCIS
network. The visual indication is provided with a red LED associated with each DSS button on
the DSS/BLF Console and Multiline Terminal. Pressing the DSS button allows a direct access to
the preprogrammed station within the CCIS net-work.
Busy Verification - CCIS
This feature permits an Attendant, via the Attendant Console on the 2400 IPX or the 2000 IPS,
to interrupt a busy station’s call at another switching office connected through CCIS.
Call Back - CCIS
This feature provides inter-office Call Back. A station who has dialed a busy station at another
office can set Call Back - CCIS by dialing a feature access code. When this feature has been set,
the setting station will ring as soon as the busy station becomes available.
Call Forwarding - All Calls - CCIS
This feature permits all calls destined for a particular station to be routed to another station or to
an Attendant Console, in another office in the CCIS network, regardless of the status (busy or
idle) of the called station. The activation and cancellation of this feature may be accomplished by
either the station user or an Attendant.
Call Forwarding - Busy Line – CCIS
This feature permits a call to a busy station to be immediately forwarded to a pre-designated
station or to an Attendant Console in another office in the CCIS network.
Call Forwarding – Don’t Answer - CCIS
This feature permits a call to an unanswered station to be forwarded to a pre-designated station
or to an Attendant Console in another office, when the called station does not answer after a
predetermined time period.
Call Forwarding - Intercept – CCIS
This feature allows calls to an inoperative number, through a CCIS trunk, to be intercepted and
automatically routed to a recorded announcement informing the caller that an inoperative
number was dialed and giving the Listed Directory Number for information.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 135
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Call Forwarding - Override - CCIS
This feature allows a target station user (Station A) to call a station (Station B) which has Call
Forwarding – All Calls - CCIS set.
Call Processing Indication - CCIS
This feature provides visual indications of all CCIS calls being processed or waiting processing
at the Attendant Console.
Call Transfer - All Calls - CCIS
This feature allows a station user to transfer incoming or outgoing Central Office, intra-office
and inter-office calls to another station in the CCIS network, without Attendant assistance.
Call Transfer - Attendant – CCIS
This feature permits a station user, while connected to a CCIS network call, to transfer a call to
an Attendant Console via the CCIS network.
Called Station Status Display - CCIS
This service feature provides, on the LCD display of the calling Multiline Terminal, a display of
the called station status of the remote office within the CCIS network.
Calling Name Display - CCIS
This feature permits the station name of a calling or called party at another switching office,
through the CCIS network, to be displayed either on a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant
Console.
Calling Number Display - CCIS
This feature permits the number of a calling or called party at another switching office to be
displayed either on a Multiline Terminal or an Attendant Console.
CCIS Networking via IP
This feature provides CCIS networks with Voice over IP (VoIP) or Peer-to-Peer IP capabilities
to provide a converged infrastructure over corporate Wide Area Networks (WAN). The IP
Enabled Dterm can communicate with other IP Enabled Dterm over the CCIS network (IP
based) on a peer-to-peer connection basis. And, the legacy terminals (TDM-based terminals) can
communicate with other legacy terminals or IP Enabled Dterm terminals over the CCIS network,
via IP-PAD (IP Packet Assembler/Disassembler). Voice compression of G.729a (8Kbps) and
G.723.1 (5.3Kbps/6.3Kbps) is available for those connections. The CCIS Networking via Peerto- Peer IP provides users with all TDM-based CCIS functionality, such as feature transparency,
centralized management, and centralized facilities. There are two types of connections available
for CCIS Networking via IP:
• CCIS Networking via IP (Peer-to-Peer Connections Basis) When the distant
systems are 2000 IPS, the systems are connected on a peer-to-peer basis. The CCIS call
control signals are transmitted between the built-in IP trunks (CCIS Handler; CCH) on the
MP card, over the Local Area Networks and Wide Area Networks (LAN and WAN). For
connections between IP Enabled Dterm terminals, voice signals are also transmitted over
the LAN and WAN. For connections between legacy terminals, voice signals are
transmitted via IP-PADs. This connection is also available when the distant systems are
2400 IPX supporting peer-to-peer connections.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 136
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
• CCIS Networking via IP (Non Peer-to-Peer Connections Basis) When the distant
systems are 2000 IVS2, the systems are connected with IP trunks [including Voice
Compression Trunks (VCT)], via Time Division Switch (TDSW). Voice signals of IP
Enabled Dterm terminals are transmitted via IP-PADs, while those of legacy terminals are
directly connected to the IP trunks. Call control signals between the systems are also
transmitted over the IP trunks. Voice compression of G.729a (8 kbps) and G.723.1 (5.3
kbps / 6.3 kbps) can be provided by the IP trunks with VCT cards. This connection is also
applicable when the distant systems are 2400 IPX not supporting peer-to-peer connections.
Centralized Billing - CCIS
This feature is used to collect billing information from each office within the network and to
direct it to the associated center office. Billing information is then forwarded to the central
billing centers via RS232C interfaces.
Centralized Day/Night Mode Change - CCIS
This feature switches the Day/Night mode of a remote office, linked to the main office (2400
IPX) via CCIS, in accordance with the Day/Night mode switching on the Attendant Console at
the main office.
Centralized E911 – CCIS
This feature allows the system to transmit a calling party number to the 911 Emergency systems
over CCIS tandem connection.
Consultation Hold - All Calls - CCIS
This feature permits a station user, within the CCIS network, to hold any incoming or outgoing
public network or Tie Line call while originating a call to another station within the CCIS
network.
Data Line Security - CCIS
This service feature allows the lines which are used for data transmission through CCIS to be
protected from interruptions such as Attendant Camp - On, Busy Verification - CCIS, Executive
Right of Way, and Attendant Override.
Deluxe Traveling Class Mark - CCIS
This feature provides outgoing call restrictions within the CCIS network. The following three
types of restrictions are allowed:
• Deluxe Traveling Class Mark Restriction
• Route Restriction
• Numbering Restriction
Dial Access to Attendant – CCIS
This feature allows a station user to call an Attendant Console by dialing an operator call code
through the CCIS network.
Digital Display - Station - CCIS
This service feature provides a display of the station number on the Attendant Console, during an
Attendant-to-station connection, within the CCIS network.
Digital Display - Trunk - CCIS
This service feature provides the Attendant with a visual indication of incoming and outgoing
trunk calls during an attendant-to-trunk connection within the CCIS network. Trunk Group
number and trunk identification code are displayed.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 137
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Direct-In Termination - CCIS
This feature automatically routes incoming exchange calls through CCIS to a pre-assigned
station in the network, without Attendant assistance.
Distinctive Ringing – CCIS
This feature provides distinctive station ringing patterns for terminated calls, through the CCIS
network, so that a station user can distinguish between incoming internal and external calls.
Do Not Disturb - CCIS
This feature allows a station user to establish Do Not Disturb (DND) status on a temporary basis,
during which time access to the station from CCIS calls will be denied.
Dual Hold – CCIS
This feature allows two connected Multiline Terminals to be placed on hold simultaneously over
the CCIS link. This enables the held parties to answer or originate a call from a secondary
extension or the idle primary extension.
Elapsed Time Display – CCIS
This feature provides an LCD which shows the duration of time that a Multiline Terminal is
connected to any trunk through the CCIS network.
Flexible Numbering of Stations – CCIS
This feature allows voice and data station numbers to be assigned to any instrument in the CCIS
network, based solely upon numbering plan limitations.
Hands-Free Answerback - CCIS
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal station user to respond to a voice call, through the CCIS
network, without lifting the handset.
Hot Line – CCIS
This feature allows two stations, at different nodes in the CCIS network, to be mutually
associated on an automatic ringdown basis through the CCIS network.
House Phone – CCIS
This feature allows selected stations to call an Attendant Console, through the CCIS network,
simply by going off hook.
Incoming Call Identification - CCIS
This feature allows an Attendant to visually identify the type of service and/or trunk group which
is arriving or waiting to be answered at the Attendant Console through the CCIS network.
Individual Attendant Access – CCIS
This feature permits a station user to call a specific Attendant Console, in the CCIS network,
using an individual Attendant Identification Number.
LDN Night Connection – CCIS
This feature routes Listed Directory Number (LDN) calls to a pre-selected station, in the CCIS
network, when the Night mode has been entered.
Link Alarm Display - CCIS
This feature provides an indication on external equipment when the CCIS link is
connected/disconnected, when the system is initialized, or when the CCH is in make-busy.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 138
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Link Reconnect - CCIS
This feature provides the system connected to CCIS network with the capability to release the
redundant CCIS link connection and re-connect the link within the system for efficient usage of
the CCIS links.
Message Waiting Lamp Setting - Attendant – CCIS
This feature allows an Attendant, in the 2400 IPX, to set or cancel a Message Waiting lamp
indication, through the CCIS network, on a station in 2000 IPS.
Message Waiting Lamp Setting - Station – CCIS
This feature allows a station user, in the 2400 IPX, to set or cancel a Message Waiting lamp
indication, through the CCIS network, to a station in 2000 IPS with this feature.
Miscellaneous Trunk Access - CCIS
This feature provides access to all types of external and customer-provided equipment/facilities,
such as Tie Line and exchange network, along with Dictation, Paging Access - CCIS and Code
Calling through the CCIS network.
Miscellaneous Trunk Restriction - CCIS
This feature denies certain stations and dial-repeating tie trunks access to specific trunk groups,
such as Tie Line, exchange network, Dictation or Paging Access - CCIS through the CCIS
network.
Multiple Call Forwarding - All Calls - CCIS
This feature allows the last hop of a Multiple Call Forwarding - All Calls sequence to be
forwarded over a CCIS network to a station in another office.
Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line – CCIS
This feature allows the last hop of a Multiple Call Forwarding - Busy Line sequence to be
forwarded over a CCIS network to a station in another office.
Multiple Call Forwarding – Don’t Answer- CCIS
This feature allows the last hop of a Multiple Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer sequence to be
forwarded over a CCIS network to a station in another office.
Multiple Console Operation – CCIS
This feature provides console operation where Attendant Consoles are installed in more than one
node in the CCIS network.
Network Station Number - CCIS (FCCS)
When 2000 IPS is connected to a 2400 IPX via CCIS link, Network Station Number can be
moved to other office within the network by a simple command operation from the Centralized
MAT in the 2400 IPX.
Night Connection - Fixed – CCIS
This feature routes calls normally directed to the Attendant Console to a pre-selected station in
another office, through the CCIS network, when the Night mode has been entered.
Night Connection - Flexible – CCIS
This feature provides an inter-office night connection service, via the CCIS network, when the
calling station and the night station belong to different offices.
Outgoing Trunk Queuing - CCIS
This feature allows a CCIS network station, upon encountering an all trunk busy signal, to dial a
specified access code and enter a first-in, first-out queue. As soon as a CCIS trunk becomes
available, stations in the queue will be called back on a first-come, first-served basis.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 139
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Paging Access - CCIS
This feature provides dial access to paging equipment from an Attendant Console or a station,
through the CCIS network.
Restriction from Outgoing Calls - CCIS
This feature automatically restricts users of pre-selected stations from placing outgoing calls
and/or certain miscellaneous trunk calls through CCIS, without Attendant assistance.
Service Display - CCIS
This feature generates LCD displays on the Multiline Terminal corresponding to the various
features as they are initiated.
Single-Digit Station Calling - CCIS
This feature allows the assignment of Single-Digit Station numbers.
Station-Controlled Conference - CCIS
This feature allows any station of the 2400 IPX to establish a conference among a maximum of
eight parties of stations and/or trunks (inside and outside parties) of the 2000 IPS, through CCIS.
Station-to-Station Calling - CCIS
This feature permits any station user to dial another station directly, through CCIS, without
Attendant assistance.
Station-to-Station Calling - Operator Assistance – CCIS
This feature allows a station user to call another station in the CCIS network, with the assistance
of an Attendant Console operator.
Toll Restriction - 3/6 Digits - CCIS
This feature allows the system to be programmed to restrict outgoing calls, through CCIS,
according to specific Area and/or Office Codes. This restriction is determined on the basis of a
three-digit Area Code or six-digit Area and Office Code numbering plan.
Trunk Answer from Any Station - CCIS
This feature allows any station, not restricted from incoming calls, to answer incoming calls
when the network is in Night mode.
Trunk-to-Trunk Restriction - CCIS
This feature allows Trunk-to-Trunk tandem restriction by caller’s information sent from each
office (e.g., caller is a trunk) through the CCIS network.
Uniform Numbering Plan – CCIS
In a CCIS network, a Uniform Numbering Plan enables a station user to call any other station in
the network. Two alternative numbering plans are provided. In the first plan, the station user
dials any digit station number from three to eight. The location of the office is identified by the
first one-, two-, or three-digit of the station number. In the second plan, the station user dials a
one-, two- or three-digit office code and any digit station number from two to eight.
Voice Call - CCIS
This feature provides a voice path, through the CCIS network, between a Multiline Terminal in
one office and a Multiline Terminal in another office. This path is established from the calling
party to the called party’s built-in speaker. If the called party’s MIC lamp is on, the called party
can have a conversation in hands-free.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 140
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Voice Mail Integration – CCIS
This feature allows any station user in the CCIS network to utilize the Voice Mail System
(VMS) with the Message Center Interface (MCI).
Voice Mail Live Record over CCIS
Previously in a CCIS network of multiple IPS systems all sharing a centralized voice mail only
the site where the voice mail was attached could use the Live Record feature. With R12.1 on the
IPS it is now possible to use Live Record (automatic or manual recording) from all IPS systems
with R12.1 installed. When a tandem connection is required to reach voice mail only the
originating and destination IPS offices need to have R12.1 software installed.
Voice Mail Private Password - CCIS
Voice Mail Password can be prevented from displaying in LCD of Multiline Terminals when
connected to the voice mail system via CCIS.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 141
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
ISDN Features
Call-By-Call Service Selection
Services can be selected on a call-by-call basis to all channels of a single PRI interface according
to applications. Services may be used on any available channel, unlike Trunk Provisioning
Service, in which services are assigned to specific channels.
Called Party Recognition Service [Direct-In Termination (DIT)]
This feature provides an incoming Direct-In Termination (DIT) call via an ISDN trunk to be
connected to a predetermined station. This application can be used for a station or modem.
CLI Transparency
This feature provides a Calling Line Identity (CLI) received from ISDN or CCIS trunk to
transparently send outgoing ISDN trunk, in case of tandem connection (ISDN-to-ISDN or CCISto-ISDN).
CPN to Network - Present
This feature allows the ISDN network to be informed of the Calling Party Number and Name
(CPN) when a call originates from a terminal connected to the System.
CPN to Terminating User - Display
This feature provides a visual display of the originating station’s number and sub-address
information on a Multiline Terminal for incoming ISDN calls. This provides the terminal user
with a quick and accurate way to identify the originating station’s number (Calling Number).
DID Addressing
This feature allows incoming ISDN-PRI calls to terminate to stations, attendant console,
automated attendant, etc., based on the called party number. Direct Inward Dial trunks will be
terminated to programmed destinations without attendant assistance.
DID Addressing and DOD Addressing
This feature allows the system to use DID and DOD on the same B-Channels. Trunk
Provisioning Service election is not required. (B-Channels can be used for DID and DOD
without separating the trunk routes.)
Event-Based CCIS
This feature allows a PBX customer who does not have a tie line (or when a customer cannot use
the tie line due to busy or fault of the line), to use the various CCIS feature by using the ISDN
line as a CCIS virtual tie line, on the IMX to UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS connection or the
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to IPS connection.
ISDN Terminal
This feature provides the system with an ISDN Terminal or Terminal Adapter (TA). ISDN
Terminal to ISDN Terminal, ISDN Terminal to ISDN Trunk, ISDN Trunk to ISDN Terminal,
ISDN Terminal to Single Line Telephone, ISDN Terminal to Multiline Terminal, and ISDN
Terminal to PS connections are available.
MEGACOM® Access/WATS
AT&T’s MEGACOM® (WATS) network, as well as WATS from other carriers, can be used.
MEGACOM® 800 Service/800 WATS Ultra WATS
AT&T’s MEGACOM® 800 (Inward WATS) network, as well as 800 WATS provided by other
carriers, can be used.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 142
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
MULTIQUEST® /900 Service
AT&T’s MultiQuest® service can be used. (It is a “900”-type service.) Also, 900 service
provided by other carriers can be used.
Sub-address – Present
This feature allows a Primary Rate Interface ISDN trunk to transfer the Called Party Sub-address
information to a destination ISDN station when the call is originated by the system. Dialing the
called party station number and sub-address is required.
Trunk Provisioning Service Selection
Each channel of a PRI interface can be dedicated to a particular service. Services are designated
to specific channels; once designated, a channel can be used only for that service.
Q-SIG Circuit Switched Basic Call – ETSI Version
Q-SIG conforms to ETS 300 172. This feature enables NEC’s PBX to connect to NEC’s PBX or
other manufacturer by using Layer 3 protocol for the signaling for the support of circuit mode
bearer services at the Q reference point.
The following services can be provided in conjunction with this feature:
a. Common station/voice service
Call Forwarding - All Calls Note 1
Call Forwarding - Busy Line Note 1
Call Forwarding - No Answer Note 1
Caller ID Display Note 1
Direct-In Termination Note 1
Call Transfer - All Calls Note 1
Hot Line Note 1
Do Not Disturb Note 1
Calling Number Display
b. Attendant Console service
System Speed Dialing Note 2
Call Queuing
c. Network features
Trunk-to-Trunk Connection
Brokerage - Hot Line
Least Cost Routing - 3/6 Digit
Tie Lines
Note 1: Service not based on the specification of Q-SIG supplementary service.
Note 2: Service provided with some limitations.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 143
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Wireless Features
Analog PBX Interface
This feature allows a secretary to interrupt the boss in a private way. By pressing a feature key or
dialing an Access Code, the secretary
Announcement - PS No Answer /
Announcement - PS Out of Zone
This feature allows calls to a PS which cannot be paged in a predetermined period of time to be
routed to the announcement notifying the calling party that the PS cannot answer.
Announcements can be divided between Announcement-PS No Answer and Announcement-PS
Out of Zone depending on the PS condition.
Call Forwarding-Not Available
When a PS is power off or out of zone, a call directed to the PS is forwarded to a VMS, and a
voice mail message can be recorded to the VMS and checked from the PS. Also the VMS can
page the PS automatically after the voice mail message is recorded.
Call Forwarding-PS Out of Zone
This feature allows calls directed to a PS which is power off or out of zone to be routed to an
another station, an Attendant, an outside number or voice mail equipment. The call forwarding
destination can be set/cancelled from the PS station or MAT/CAT.
CCIS Interface
This feature allows the WCS to be integrated with NEC PBXs with CCIS interface.
Calling Name Display - PS
Without answering incoming calls or hold calls terminates to the PS, the calling party’s name
can be confirmed by the indications on the LCD.
Calling Number Display - PS
This feature provides a display on the LCD of a PS receiving a call, indicating the station
number.
DTMF Signal Sender
This feature allows a PS user to send the DTMF signal (tone) to the called party (terminal, voice
mail system, etc.) while engaged in communication.
Handover
When the signal transmission quality becomes inferior, a PS re-originates a call automatically
and seizes another radio channel, making the WCS handover the call to another zone transceiver
to maintain the speech quality.
Individual PS Calling
This feature allows the calling party to page the individual PS.
Last Number Redial-PS
This feature enables a PS to store the numbers dialed in the previous five calls including the last
number dialed. The stack dial numbers are sequentially displayed on the LCD, allowing the
station user to make an outgoing call by selecting the desired dialed number from the display.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 144
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Multi-Line Operation-PS
PS equipped with two line keys, L1 key and L2 key, and different station numbers can be
assigned to each of two lines. The number assigned to L1 key of the PS is called My Line and
the other number assigned to L2 key is called Sub Line. My Line and Sub Line of a PS can be
assigned to appear on the Flexible Line Keys of a Dterm and the Dterm can share the PS lines.
Multi-Site Roaming
PS user can originate or receive a call in any place of a network provided by the plural PBXs
which are interfaced by JT-Q931-a.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Wired for Wireless
This feature allows the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS to have the Wireless PBX feature.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides several integrated features adding on the adjunctive
configuration.
Number Sharing
This feature allows the Dterm user to have a PS as Sub Station and to get service with one
telephone number. In case that one user has both Dterm and PS, with this feature used, the user
is not required to have separate two telephone numbers.
- When user is at his desk, a call is terminated to Dterm.
- When user leaves his desk with PS, a call is automatically terminated to PS.
In this feature, the Dterm and PS are referred as Main Station and Sub Station, respectively.
Out of Zone Indication
When a PS user moves out of the service area and the electric field strength becomes weak, this
feature notifies it to the user with the warning tone and the LCD display.
Overlap Dialing
This feature allows a PS user to receive dial tone and dial the desired number to originate a call.
Preset Dialing
This feature allows a PS user to confirm the number to be dialed before originating a call.
PS Authorization
This feature is to confirm the identity of a PS to avoid an unauthorized PS from accessing the
system.
PS Location Indication
This feature is when PS calls a Multiline Terminals/Attendant Console or vice versa, this feature
allows indicating the location name of the ZT that is connected to the PS on the LCD of the
Multiline Terminal.
PS Location Registration
This feature allows the WCS to supervise the location of each PS, upon receiving the location
registration request, to allow call termination.
PS Location Search
This feature allows a Multiline Terminal user to search and display a location name of a specific
PS number on the LCD of the Multiline Terminal. The location name is a ZT name where the PS
is located in the ZT’s radio zone.
Q.931a Roaming over IP Trunk
PS user can originate or receive a call in any place of a network provided by multiple PBXs that
communicate by JT-Q931a protocol over IP Trunks (IPT+VCT) or Peer to Peer Trunks.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 145
CHAPTER 5 FEATURE DESCRIPTION
Radio Channel Changeover
This feature is to supervise and changeover the channel automatically to avoid the interference
and to maintain the speech quality.
Short Message Notification (OAI)
This feature enables a Short Text Message (STM), once arrived at a mail box of the STM Server
(external equipment), to be automatically distributed to the addressee PS via Open Application
Interface (OAI). This feature also provides “TM Full” notification on the display (LCD) of the
address PS that is busy. If the PS is out of zone, the feature makes retransmission of the STM
after the PS returns to the zone.
Soft Phone Wireless Handset
This feature allows a Soft Phone (Dterm SP30) user to use a PS terminal as the handset of the
Soft Phone. The user can select a handset (Soft Phone Handset or PS) by pressing the Handset
Switch key on the Soft Phone.
Speech Encryption
This feature protects a call from being tapped.
Speed Dial-PS
This feature allows a PS user to dial the certain frequently called numbers using two-digit
abbreviated call codes.
Station Hunting - Not Available
This feature allows a call placed to a PS station, which is out of zone or power off, to be
forwarded to an idle station in a hunt group. Two Station Hunting arrangements are available.
• Station Hunting - Circular processes the call regardless of which station in the hunt group is
called.
• Station Hunting - Terminal initiates a hunt only when the pilot number of a hunt group is
called.
Voice Mail Indication
When a message is mailed in the PS, an indication of the envelop icon is displayed in the LCD of
the PS.
WLAN Handset Registration/Service
This feature allows the 2000 IPS to accommodate the WLAN Handset
(MH210/MH220/MH250) as a station. A terminal is connected to the 2000 IPS through Access
Point and SIP Handler and operates under the control of the virtual CS on the SIP Handler.
Station-to-Station calls between WLAN stations and calls between WLAN stations and existing
stations/trunks are available.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 146
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
Chapter 6 System Overview
Operating Environment
Operating Condition
Temperature Relative Humidity
Normal Operations
5oC - 30oC
41oF - 86oF
15% - 65%
Non-Condensing
Short Periods**
-0oC - 40oC
32oF - 104oF
15% - 90%
Non-Condensing
During Storage and Transit
-18oC - 50oC
0oF - 122oF
8% - 90%
Non-Condensing
**Not to exceed 72 consecutive hours or 15 days in a year.
Grounding Requirements
The system grounding must have a specific ground resistance and AC noise level, and is to be
connected to a predetermined terminal in the PBX. Standard grounding requirements are as
shown below:
Communication grounding : Less than 10 ohm
Protective ground for PIM : Less than 10 ohm
Note: The AC ripple on these various grounds should be less than 0.5Vp-p.
CAUTION
Grounding circuit continuity is vital for safe operation of telecommunication
equipment. Never operate this equipment with the grounding conductor
The following specific requirements apply to ground wiring.
An equipment grounding conductor that is at least as large as the ungrounded branch-supply
conductors is to be installed as part of the circuit that supplies the PBX. Bare, covered, or
insulated grounding conductors are acceptable. Individually covered or insulated equipment
grounding conductors shall have a continuous outer finish that is either green, or green with one
or more yellow stripes. The equipment grounding connector is to be connected to ground at the
service equipment.
The attachment-plug receptacles in the vicinity of the PBX are all to be of a grounding type, and
the equipment grounding conductors serving these receptacles are to be connected to earth
ground at the service equipment.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 147
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
AC Power Requirements
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
AC Input Voltage
90 to 132Vac or 180 to 264Vac; 47 to 64Hz
AC Input Current
3.5A(at 100V), 2.0A(at 200V)
Installation
The following items are required for correct operation.
a.) Adequate space accommodation
b.) Adequate ventilation
c.) Commercial AC power
Main Equipment
The installation of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS is comprised of up to 8 Port Interface
Modules (PIMs). A PIM provides 13 card slot for Common Control, Line/Trunk (LT), and
Application Porcessors (AP) cards. It also houses an AC/DC Power Supply, DC/DC Power
Supply (for –48V), and batteries for protection from short-term (about 30 minutes) power
interruption.
Cabling inside the unit, between the switching equipment and the MDF, can all be done by plugand-jack connections, while printed circuit cards can easily be plugged into the edge connectors.
On all installations, a special provision for plug-and-jack connections completely eliminates
possible errors in wiring. This allows the installation to be done easily and smoothly.
Mounting Circuit Cards
(1) Before mounting the circuit cards, confirm the following items.
Wrist Strap is connected to Frame Ground.
Switch settings of circuit cards are already completed.
The “SW1” switches of all PZ-PW121 cards are turned off.
(2) Mount circuit cards into their mounting positions according to the “Bay Face Layout” and
“Port Assignment Table” given in the Office Data Programming Manual.
Various installation Methods
To meet the specific needs of the customer's environment, UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides
the following installation methods:
Floor Standing Installation
Wall-mounting Installation
IEC standard 19 inch Rack-mounting Installation
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 148
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
System Administration
In this system, the Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) or Maintenance Administration
Terminal (MAT) is used for programming the system data. The CAT is a digital multi-function
telephone (Dterm) which is equipped with function keys, a dial pad and LCD and interfaces with
the system via the MP card. The Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) is a personal
computer that provides an interface to the PBX via the system CPU card. The MAT PC must
have the MATWorXTM program properly installed to communicate with the PBX. MATWorX
is required for system software registration and activation.
Password Entry
In a system with password service, a maintenance person is required to enter an authorization
level number (Password Level) and appropriate password prior to engaging in programming the
system data with the MAT/CAT. A maximum of eight (8) Password Levels can be set up. The
number of commands that the maintenance person can access is determined by the Password
Level.
Resident System Program
This resident system program generates system data automatically according to the system
hardware configuration, thereby providing immediate operation and shorter programming time.
When activated, the system scans hardware configuration (such as line/trunk card location) and
assigns the system data (such as station numbers, trunk numbers, etc.) according to a
predetermined generic program assignment.
Service Conditions
1. This service is applicable for equipment installed in PIM0 through PIM3.
2. Data for any vacant slot is not assigned.
3. Virtual stations are not assigned.
4. A line/trunk card (PN-AUCA/PN-DK00/ /PN-4DAT/PN-4RSTF/PN-4VCTI) is not
assigned, even if mounted.
5. An application card is not assigned, even if mounted.
6. No tenant assignment is provided. (Tenant 01 is assigned)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 149
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
System Diagnostics
When a fault occurs in the system, an audible and visual indication will be given at the following
units:
External alarm indicating unit
Fault messages reported at MATWorX for remote reporting
Alarm lamps in front of each package mounted in the frame
Self Diagnostic/System Messages
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides a sophisticated array of self-diagnostic routines that
are continually and automatically being performed. Various system messages are printed when a
fault occurs in a central processor system, switch network processors. Many other miscellaneous
system messages and change of key status messages are also printed.
Customer Administration Terminal (CAT)
The Customer Administration Terminal (CAT) is a digital multi-function telephone (Dterm)
which is equipped with function keys, a dial pad and LCD and interfaces with the system via the
MP card. Programming of the system can be done from selected Multiline Terminals with LCD.
The designated Multiline Terminals can be placed in program mode, and system data can then be
changed. To prevent unauthorized changes, password levels are assigned, providing
authorization for access to certain areas of programming and denying access to others.
Service Conditions
1. Programming from a Customer Administration Terminal can only be accomplished when
the system is online.
2. All Multiline Terminals with LCD scanned during initialization will be Customer
Administration Terminals.
3. The commands CM00 (Office Data All Clear) and CM01 (Office Data Partial Clear)
cannot be accessed from the CAT. The CAT cannot delete itself from the system program.
4. Only two Customer Administration Terminals can be in program mode at the same time.
5. The data that can be changed from the CAT can be limited by the Password level
assigned. There are eight levels of Passwords that can be assigned in system
programming. The relation between Password level and access to available commands is
also assigned in system programming.
6. A password can consist of a maximum of any eight digits with the following limitation:
The password cannot be CCCCCCCC or FFFFFFFF.
7. Caution should be exercised when assigning Passwords to command authorization levels.
If a password is forgotten, access to system programming will be limited and a system
initialization with subsequent programming may be required.
8. When the Customer Administration Terminal is offline for programming, it cannot access
normal terminal functions.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 150
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT)
The Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) is a personal computer (PC) that is used for
programming and maintenance of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS system. The MAT can provide
a Maintenance Printout, Peg Count information and fault message output. Additionally, the
MAT can be used to Remove and Restore to service any station in the system and can read or
save system data from disks. The MAT can assign the Key Data for the Attendant Console. The
MAT requires an IBM or compatible PC running Microsoft Windows 98, NT 4.0, 2000 or XP
and MATWorX.
MATWorX is a Graphical User Interface (GUI) program that provides an efficient method for
manipulating the PBX database. This program contains extensive help files, Usage Wizards and
Tool Tips, with hyperlinks imbedded in the text. The hyperlinks provide quick access to the
appropriate Add-In modules. Add-In modules provide a user-friendly, intuitive method for
customizing the PBX database.
MATWorX add-ins makes it easy for you to add or remove PBX features at any time. Add-ins
are modular components that let you program specific features such as Caller ID, Station
Assignments, Day/Night Modes, and Line Key Assignments.
Because add-ins are modular, you can add, remove, and upgrade them individually from within
MATWorX. Add-ins let you modify your PBX's features without having to upgrade the
MATWorX application itself. MATWorX also gives you a convenient way to launch other
commonly used applications, such as Microsoft Word or Excel, directly from its Toolbar.
Connecting to a PBX
There are three ways to connect your PC to an NEC PBX:
Use a modem to establish a dial-up connection.
Use a serial cable to establish a direct connection.
Use TCP/IP over your Local Area Network (LAN), Requires DeviceServerWorX (DSW)
The method you use depends on how you installed and configured the device to which you want
to connect. A serial cable direct connection offers better performance than a modem connection,
but requires that the PC and device be within 50 feet of each other. A TCP/IP connection offers
excellent performance and flexibility but requires a network connection to both your PC and the
device.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 151
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
PBX Configuration Wizard
The PBX Configuration Wizard is a custom tool in MATWorX that enables you to establish the
proper communication settings between your computer and the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS. The
Wizard asks you simple questions and then uses the information to automatically configure the
connection for the PC and the PBX.
Service Conditions
1. Connection through modems is available, providing remote maintenance capabilities.
2. MATWorX can be connected to the system either directly or remotely. Direct connection is
through the RS connector on the MP card. Remote connection is available via either an
internal modem on the MP card or an external modem for high speed. Remote connection via
the internal modem is through the COT card. Connection between the modem and the COT
is accomplished through internal switching of the TDSW. Remote connection via an external
modem is through the MP card.
3. The following functions can be performed from MATWorX:
System, station, and trunk data entry, change, and copy.
Loading, saving, and verification of system data to and from a disk.
ROM check readout of generic program.
Display of fault/fault cleared messages.
On-site or remote access to the system.
Printout of system data (when printer is connected to PC).
Display and setting of system clock/calendar.
Numbering Plan
Least Cost Routing (LCR)
System initialize
UCD/Station Hunting/Call Pickup – Group
4. The PC used with MATWorX must have an RS-232C port, and cannot be located more than
50 feet (15m) from the system when connected on premises.
5. When stations or trunks are expanded, moved, or changed, office data for a Multiline
Terminal key/station/ trunk can be copied and multiple assignments of related office data is
possible.
MACH Script Editor
This is a powerful timesaving tool that enables you to create a list of UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS
commands that perform tasks in the PBX. This list is referred to as a script, which can be saved
and run at anytime. You can also use the MACH Script Editor to perform many other operations.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 152
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
Remote Maintenance
This feature allows station and trunk changes or reassignments to be performed without a site
visit by service personnel, and can be used to retrieve fault codes prior to visiting a site. One
Remote Maintenance center can service an unlimited amount of systems, thus reducing the
amount of personnel to maintain each site, travel costs and customer billing for each site.
Service Conditions
1. The following additional equipment is required for this feature:
A modem at the maintenance center and one at each remote site. (When the internal
modem of the Main Processor (MP) is used, no modem at each remote site is required)
A cable for connection between the MP and the on-site modem. (When the internal
modem of the MP is used, the above cable is not required)
2. The internal modem of the MP is compatible with the following specifications:
ITU-T V.22 1200 bps
ITU-T V.22 bis 2400 bps
Bell 212A 1200 bps
ITU-T V.32 4800/9600 bps
ITU-T V.34 19.2 k/33.6 kbps
3. Any one of the following connections are also required for access to the modem:
A dedicated line
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Attendant controlled transfer
Direct Inward Termination
4. The following operations can be executed from the Remote Maintenance location:
Retrieval of fault data
Retrieval of Peg Count information
Deletion or addition of system data (line, trunk, etc.) using a preprogrammed security
password
Data assignment by device number (stations, trunks, and Attendant Console)
Copying of station data from one station to other stations (when adding sequential
stations in groups)
Release / Reconnection of backup batteries
Display of station line status
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 153
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
MP Program Download
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS provides Online MP Program Download via IP network using
the CP24D, CP31E, and CP31D. This feature allows an MP upgrade program to be downloaded
to the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS MP card with the PBX on-line and during the download
process all features and functions are available. The MP Program Download feature is available
to a stand alone system or a Remote system in a Remote PIM network.
The IPS downloads the MP upgrade program from FTP server using MATWorX. MATWorX
and the FTP server can be installed and running on the same PC. A single FTP server or multiple
FTP servers can be used. Immediate or scheduled changeover to the upgrade program is
available. It is also possible to change back to the previous program that was in use before the
changeover (changeback).
MP Download Process
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 154
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
Service Conditions
General Service Conditions
The MP program download can be executed to the PN-CP24-D/PN-CP31-D (MP card)
when a PZ-M606-A is mounted. PZ-M697 (ETHER) card is mounted on the PN-CP31-E
(MP) card.
For the Retrofit and Backup CPU systems remote download of MP program is not
available.
The call processing is stopped while the system is initialized by the program changeover
execution.
Remote download of AP program is not available.
While the PBX is off-line, you cannot execute the program downloading, or program
changeover/changeback/program version matching (immediate). However, it is possible
to read various information and set the schedule (date/time) for program
changeover/changeback/program version matching even while the PBX is off-line.
Program Download Service Conditions
Do not reset the PBX and the MATWorX during MP program downloading.
Do not pull out the LAN cable during MP program downloading.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) is used as the protocol for the remote download of MP
program.
Only the file specified in “File Name” of CHECKSUM.TXT can be downloaded to the
PBX.
If you do not set the directory name to save the program files and CHECKSUM.TXT by
MATWorX, they are saved to the FTP directory (default).
If you do not set the password and user ID of the FTP server by MATWorX, login to the
FTP server with anonymous.
If required FTP server information is not set when executing the MP program download,
“DATA NOT SET” is displayed.
For the TCP port, the specified port is used for file transfer (control), and the port in front
of it is used for the file transfer. For example, when the TCP port is set to 3000, Port No.
3000 is used for the file transfer (control), and Port No. 2999 is used for the file transfer
(Port 21-File transfer (control), Port 20-File transfer: default).
If you read the issue number of the standby side (outdated side) and change the settings
of FTP information during MP program downloading, “WAIT, BUSY NOW” is
displayed.
When using a single FTP server to update multiple sites in remote PIM network schedule
the file transfer at least 7 minutes or more apart so that bandwidth and the number of
connections to the FTP server are not exceeded.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 155
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
Program Changeover Service Conditions
The system is initialized automatically after executing the program changeover any data
that is not backed up will lost. Be sure to execute the office data backup before executing
the program changeover.
If an error is detected during system initialization after executing the program
changeover, the PBX starts automatically with the previous program.
If the program download is executed while the program version matching is being
executed, the program version matching is interrupted, and program download is
executed.
If the program changeover (immediate) is executed while the program version matching
is being executed, the program is changed after the program version matching is
completed.
The program changeover cannot be executed if the program downloading or program
version matching is interrupted or fails. If the program changeover (immediate) is set, the
setting is invalid.
The program changeover for which the schedule (date/time) has been set is executed
only when the PBX is on-line.
When immediate program changeover is executed after a schedule (date/time) for
program changeover execution is set, the schedule is invalid.
Required Hardware
Equipment
CP24D (IPS/IPS Remote PIM)
CP31E (IPSDML)
CP31D (IPSDMR)
Comments
Main and Remote sites
Upgrade Program
MATWorX IPS
Version 13.0.0
PC/Work station for FTP
Note
Windows 2000 Server/Windows 2000
Professional Windows XP Professional
(Internet Information Server (IIS) supplied with
Windows 2000/XPProfessional can be used)
Note: MATWorX and FTP server program can be used on the same PC.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 156
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
MA4000 Management System
MA4000 Management System is a web based, powerful voice server management configuration
suite. MA4000 offers centralized management for the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Voice Server
as well as simple and powerful tools for managing moves, adds and changes. MA4000 also
offers flexibility and security and allows the end user to manage their voice server in the same
ways they manage their networks.
•
Web Browser Operation
•
Email Alarm Notification
•
Alarm Client Notification
•
LDAP Auto Provisioning Service
•
LDAP Authentication
•
Windows Authentication
•
IT Friendly Interface
•
Flexible Access Levels (Roles)
•
Application Program Interface (API & SDK)
•
Security
-
HTTPS supported
-
Audit Trail Logging
•
Customizable Portals
•
Command Line Interface
•
Integration to OpenWorX
•
Centralized Authentication Service (NEC CAS)
•
System Health Monitoring
•
Range programming that is schedulable
The MA4000 IPS Assistant gives the power of station management directly to the end-user.
Limited by access rights, an administrator can allow his users to manage their own phones.
Supported features include Button Programming, Call Forwarding and Speed Dial Programming.
System Requirement
The following are the specifications for the Web Client machines. These machines only access
the MA4000 via a web browser and have no actual software installed on them.
WEB Client
Processor:
RAM:
Hard Drive Space:
Video:
Web Browser:
Input Device:
Operating System:
Minimum
Intel® Pentium® 450 MHz
64 MB
10 MB
800 x 600 SVGA Monitor
Any HTTP 1.1 compliant
Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
Windows® 98 SE
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Recommended
Intel Pentium 700 MHz or higher
128 MB or more
100 MB or more
1024 x 768 SVGA Monitor
Internet Explorer 5.5 or greater
Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
Windows 2000/XP with latest
Service Pack
Page 157
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
The following requirements are for a single user system running the MA4000 Management
System software.
WEB Server
Processor:
RAM:
Hard Drive Space:
Video:
Web Browser:
Drives:
Input Device:
Ethernet Port:
USB Port:
Web Server Used:
Operating System:
Database:
Minimum
Intel® Pentium® 450 MHz
1 GB (1024 MB)
500 MB
800 x 600 SVGA Monitor
Any HTTP 1.1 compliant
CD ROM
Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
10/100 MB
At least one unused USB Port
Microsoft Internet Information
Server version 5.0 or higher
Windows® 2000/XP Professional
with latest Service Pack
Microsoft® SQL MSDE with the
latest Service Pack
Recommended
Intel Pentium 2 GHz or higher
1 GB (1024 MB)
500 MB or more
1024 x 768 SVGA Monitor
Internet Explorer 5.5 or greater
CD ROM
Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
10/100 MB
At least one unused USB Port
Microsoft Internet Information
Server version 5.0 or higher
Windows 2000/2003 Server with
latest Service Pack
Microsoft SQL 2000 Personal or
Standard depending on the OS
with the latest Service Pack
The following requirements are for a single user system running the MA4000 Management
System software.
WEB Server
Processor:
RAM:
Hard Drive Space:
Video:
Web Browser:
Drives:
Input Device:
Ethernet Port:
USB Port:
Web Server Used:
Operating System:
Database:
Minimum
Intel® Pentium® 450 MHz
512 MB
500 MB
800 x 600 SVGA Monitor
Any HTTP 1.1 compliant
CD ROM
Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
10/100 MB
At least one unused USB Port
Microsoft Internet Information
Server version 5.0 or higher
Windows® 2000/XP Professional
with latest Service Pack
Microsoft® SQL MSDE with the
latest Service Pack
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Recommended
Intel Pentium 2 GHz or higher
512 MB
500 MB or more
1024 x 768 SVGA Monitor
Internet Explorer 5.5 or greater
CD ROM
Mouse & 101 Key Keyboard
10/100 MB
At least one unused USB Port
Microsoft Internet Information
Server version 5.0 or higher
Windows 2000/2003 Server with
latest Service Pack
Microsoft SQL 2000 Personal or
Standard depending on the OS
with the latest Service Pack
Page 158
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
Equipment List
DESCRIPTION
MA4000 Management Software
MA4000 SQL Processor Lic (1)
MA4000 CUST Provided DB Option
MA4000 MSDE DB Option
MA4000 SQL 2000 Generic PKG
MA4000 IPS Manager Option
MA4000 IPS Ext Lic (1)
MA4000 IPS Assistant Lic. (1)
MA4000 LDAP APS Option
NOTES
Includes all MA4000 Programs;
System Manager and a USB Key
Includes MS SQL 2000 Standard & Personal DB (1 CD)
Includes one processor license for unlimited client
browser access to the MA4000 Manager & Assistant
system
Enables MA4000 to work with a Customer Provided MS
SQL 2000 Database. Customer is responsible for
providing the database and for all licensing
Enables MA4000 to work with MSDE Database.
Simultaneous client-browser access is limited to five
Provides Microsoft SQL 2000 database CD with one
folder containing Personal Edition and one folder
containing Standard Edition
1 required when managing UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS
Voice Servers
1 License is required for each IPS extension to be
managed
1 License is required for each IPS extension using the
Desktop interface
Enables the MA4000 LDAP Auto Provisioning Service
(LAPS)
Optional Server and Hardware
DESCRIPTION
120Rd-1 w/ Win2K3 Server
Note
NOTES
Includes 2.8 GHz Processor, 1GB RAM, 1-36GB Hard
Drive, Windows 2003 Server Operating System
Logitech PS/2 Wheelmouse OEM
Ivory
Intel 104 Keyboard PS/2
Intel Keyboard
NEC Acusync AS500 Monitor
NEC 15” Monitor
2.8GHz/512KB CPU KIT (120Rd-1)
Additional CPU for 1U Servers
512MB LP SDRAM (2x256MB)
KIT120Rd-1
Additional 512MB RAM for 1U Servers. 1U Servers
support up to 1.5GB of RAM
HDD 36G 15K RPM HOTPLUG KIT
1-CHANNEL U320 RAID w/64M
CACHE (120Lg)
Logitech Mouse
Additional Hard Drive for 1U Servers. 1U Servers
support up to 3 Hard Drives.
RAID Controller for RAID 1 (Two Hard
Drives), RAID 5 (Three Hard Drives)
Note: Server above does not include Keyboard, Mouse or Monitor. These items must be added separately
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 159
CHAPTER 6 INSTALLATION, PROGRAMMING, AND MAINTENANCE
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Documentation List
NEC offers a full complement of documents for the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS product line.
Technical documentation is available on Compact Disk (CD ROM) or on the WEB through
NTAC On-Line. This section lists all documents included on the Compact Disk (CD ROM).
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Technical Manuals
Call CenterWorX Business System Manual
Maintenance Manual
Call CenterWorX MIS Admin Manual
OAI System Manual
Call CenterWorX MIS Installation Manual
Office Data Programming
Call CenterWorX MIS Reports Manual
Q-SIG System Manual
CCIS System Manual
Q-SIG System Manual (PRT)
Command Manual
Retrofit System Guide
DML Hardware Installation Guide (440 Port)
Request for Proposal
DRS Installation and Configuration Guide
Software Upgrade Guide
Feature Programming Manual
SNMP Implementation
General Description
System Manual
INASET Installation Guide
Upgrade Guide
Installation Procedure Manual
WCS System Manual (PCS)
IPS/DML Configuration Guide
Wireless System Manual
ISDN System Manual
WLAN System Manual
MatWorX Installation Guide
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Features and Specification
Business Hotel Features and Specifications
ISDN/Q-SIG Features and Specifications
CCIS Features and Specifications
SMDR/MCI/PMS Interface Specification
CCWX ACD Features and Specifications
WCS Features and Specifications
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS User Manuals
Dterm Assistant IPS User Guide
ITR-4D-3 Dterm IP Installation Guide
Dterm Series E Agent Console User Guide
INASET Installation Guide
Dterm Series E Supervisor Console User Guide
INASET for the NEAX 2000 IPS User Guide
Dterm Series E Telephone User Guide
MatWorX IPS User Guide
Dterm Series I / Dterm IP User Guide
Power Patch Panel User Guide
Dterm Series I and Dterm IP Installation Guide
SN716 Desk Console User Guide
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 160
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 7 Specifications
Processors
The UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS, IPSDML, and IPSDMR are distributed multiprocessor systems.
Their control system consists of a Main Processor (MP), Firmware Processors (FP), and
Application Processors (AP). Both the FP and APs execute their predetermined functions under
the control of the MP.
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Control System
Stored Program Control
Processor Type
32-Bit (ElanSC520)
Program Storage
Flash ROM
Office Data Storage
Flash ROM
Processor Architecture
Central
Program Updates
Time Division Matrix
Floppy Disk
PCM Time Division (1,024 x 1.024; Non-Blocking)
Memory
MEMORY CAPACITY
PROCESSOR
TYPE
ROM
RAM
32-Bit
(ElanSC520)
32-Bit
(ElanSC520)
32-Bit
(ElanSC520)
32-Bit
(ElanSC520)
16MB
(Flash ROM)
8MB
(Flash ROM)
16MB
(Flash ROM)
16MB
(Flash ROM)
64MB
(SDRAM)
32MB
(SDRAM)
64MB
(SDRAM)
64MB
(SDRAM)
FP (PN-CP15)
16-bit (25MHz)
===
768KB
FP (PN-CP33)
16-bit (25MHz)
===
768KB
AP (PN-AP00-B)
16-bit (8MHz)
512KB
(Flash ROM)
512KB
CARD NAME
MP (PN-CP24-D)
MP (PN-CP27-B)
MP (PN-CP31-E)
MP (PN-CP31-D)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 161
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
Common Control Cards
Name Code
Remarks
PN-CP24-D
Main Processor Card for UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS.
One card is required per system.
PN-CP27-B
Main Processor Card for UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS Dual MP System.
One card is required per system.
PN-CP31-E
Main Processor Card for UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPSDML.
One card is required per system.
PN-CP31-D
Main Processor Card for UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPSDMR.
One card is required for each Remote Site.
PZ-M606A
(for IPS and
DMR)
Ethernet Control Card:
• Mounted on MP card to accommodate the Ethernet and
transmit/receive a signal of TCP/IP protocol.
• 10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to
this card.
PZ-M697
(for DML)
Ethernet Control and inter-module BUS interface Card:
• Mounted on PN-CP31-E card to accommodate the Ethernet and
transmit/receive a signal of TCP/IP protocol.
• 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX twisted pair cable is connected directly to this
card.
• BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various signals, adjusts
gate delay timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus and PCM BUS.
• Occupies two physical slots width per card on PN-CP31-E card.
PN-CP15
(for IPS)
Firmware Processor Card:
Provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768 KB), and inter-module
BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various
signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus
and PCM BUS. When the system consists of three PIMs or more, one each
of this card is mounted respectively in PIM2, PIM4, and PIM6.
PN-CP33
(for DML)
Firmware Processor Card
Provides Line/Trunk interface, Memory (RAM 768 KB), and inter-module
BUS interface. BUS interface functions as a driver/receiver of various
signals, adjusts gate delay timing and cable delay timing, monitors I/O Bus
and PCM BUS. When the system consists of three MCs or more, one each
of this card is mounted respectively in the MP slot of MC2, MC4, and MC6.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 162
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
Major specifications and functionality of the UNIVERGE NEAX IPS MPs are shown below:
Item
Central Processing
System Memory
Network Switching
3-Way Conference
DTMF Signal Sender
Music-on-Hold
Mini Jack
Audible Tone Generator (DTG)
Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO)
Built-in SMDR
Built-in MCI
Built0in PMS
Built-in FP0
BS00 Function
DTMF Receiver
AP01 Function
Built-in DRS
Virtual IPT / Virtual CSH
System data copy from active MP to standby MP
MP Program Download (FTP)
Direct Connection
MAT
Interfac Remote Connection w/Built-in MODEM
e
LAN Connection
External Alarm Indication
DAT
DK00
Application Key Program
PN-CP24-D
PN-CP27-B
ElanSC520
CP24D: Flash ROM (16MB), SDRAM (64MB)
CP27B: Flash ROM (8MB), SDRAM (32MB)
1,024 · 1,024 Time Division Switch (Note 1)
16 sets of 3-way conference circuitry
32 circuits (digit 0 to 9, *, and # are generated)
10 types are available (Note 2)
1 for External Music Source for MOH (Note 2)
Available
2 ports (Source/Receiver)
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
4 circuits
Available
Available
Available
CP27B (Dual MP) only
Available with CP24D only (Note 3)
1 port
1 port (Note 4)
Available
MJ and MN
2circuits (120 seconds per circuit)
2 circuits (relay drive x1, external key scan x1)
In EPROM
Note 1:
Refer to the Figure 4-2 on next page for the port allocation of the Time Division Switch.
Note 2:
In case of Dterm IP, the synthesized melody is provided built in to IP adapter.
Note 3:
MP Program Download (FTP) is for Stand Alone Systems Only (CP24D.)
Note 4:
No. 1 Port includes a built-in modem for a remote connection of the MAT.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 163
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
Major specifications and functionality of the UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML MP are shown below:
Item
PN-CP31-E
Central Processing
System Memory
Network Switching
3-Way Conference
DTMF Signal Sender
Music-on-Hold
Mini Jack
Audible Tone Generator (DTG)
Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO)
Built-in SMDR
Built-in MCI
Built0in PMS
Built-in FP0
BS00 Function
DTMF Receiver
AP01 Function
Built-in DRS
Virtual IPT / Virtual CSH
MP Program Download (FTP)
Direct Connection
MAT
Remote Connection w/Built-in MODEM
Interface
LAN Connection
External Alarm Indication
DAT
DK00
Application Key Program
ElanSC520
CP31E: Flash ROM (16MB), SDRAM (64MB)
1,024 · 1,024 Time Division Switch (Note 1)
16 sets of 3-way conference circuitry
32 circuits (digit 0 to 9, *, and # are generated)
10 types are available (Note 2)
1 for External Music Source for MOH (Note 2)
Available
2 ports (Source/Receiver)
Available
Available
Available
Available
Available
4 circuits
Available
Available
Available
Available
1 port
1 port
Available
MJ and MN
2circuits (120 seconds per circuit)
2 circuits (relay drive x1, external key scan x1)
In EPROM
Note 1:
Refer to the Figure 4-2 on next page for the port allocation of the Time Division Switch.
Note 2:
In case of Dterm IP, the synthesized melody is provided built in to IP adapter.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 164
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
Major specifications and functionality of the UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDMR MP are shown below:
Item
PN-CP31-D
Central Processing
System Memory
Network Switching
3-Way Conference
DTMF Signal Sender
Mini Jack
Audible Tone Generator (DTG)
Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO)
Built-in FP0
DTMF Receiver
Built-in DRS
MP Program Download (FTP)
ElanSC520
CP31D: Flash ROM (16MB), SDRAM (64MB)
Remote PIM
16 sets of 3-way conference circuitry
32 circuits (digit 0 to 9, *, and # are generated)
1 for External Music Source for MOH
Available
2 ports (Source/Receiver)
Available
4 circuits
Available
Available
Firmware Processor (FP)
Firmware Processors (FP) are required when more than two PIMs/Modular Chassis (MC) are
used. The FP provides supervision and status analysis of line/trunk ports, which reside in the
MC or PIM. The FP provides the bus interface for I/O Bus, PCM Bus, and Alarm Bus in a
multiple-PIM configuration. The major specifications of the FP are shown below:
• Central Processor Unit: 16-bit (25 MHz)
• Memory: Program Area (384 kb), Work Area (384 kb)
• BS01 Function
Name Code
Remarks
PN-CP15
Firmware Processor Card used with the
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS.
PN-CP33
Firmware Processor Card used with the
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPSDML.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 165
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
Power
AC Power Requirements
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
AC Input Voltage
90 to 132Vac or 180 to 264Vac; 47 to 64Hz
AC Input Current
3.5A(at 100V), 2.0A(at 200V)
AC Power Consumption / Thermal Output (Maximum)
DESCRIPTION
1-PIM/MC
2-PIM/MC
3-PIM/MC
4-PIM/MC
5-PIM/MC
6-PIM/MC
7-PIM/MC
8-PIM/MC
AC Power Consumption (KVA)
100V
200V
0.35
0.40
0.70
0.80
1.05
1.20
1.40
1.60
1.75
2.00
2.10
2.40
2.45
2.80
2.80
3.20
Thermal Output (BTU)
100V
200V
1,195
1,365
2,389
2,730
3,584
4,096
4,778
5,461
5,973
6,826
7,167
8,191
8,362
9,556
9,556
10,922
Battery Requirements
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Max. Battery Capacity
260AH per 4 PIM (65AH (12V) x 8)
DC Input Voltage for Battery
-24V
Built-in Battery Requirements
3.4AH (12V) x 2 (approx. 30min. backup)
Physical Size of Built-in Battery
(one 12V battery)
133(W) x 60(H) x 67(D) mm
Operating Environment
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Ambient Temperature
0 to 40
Relative Humidity
Max. 90% (non-condensing)
Electrical Characteristics (Central Office Trunk)
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Insulation Resistance
15 mega-ohms or more at 100Vdc
DC Resistance
On-hook conditions: 30 mega-ohms
Off-hook conditions: 1,700 ohms
Impedance
On-hook conditions: 20 kilo-ohms (300 to 3,400Hz)
8 kilo-ohms (at 24Hz)
Looped conditions: 600 ohms
Leak Current
0 mA at on-hook conditions
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 166
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
Transmission Characteristics (For TDM Circuits)
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
PCM Coding System
A-law/U-law
Insertion Loss
Longitudinal Balance
0.15 dB at 1KHz
20 dB or more (300 to 3,400Hz) against
600 ohms
59 dB or more (300 to 3,400Hz)
Attenuation/Frequency Distortion
-0.2 dB to +0.7 dB (300 to 3,400Hz)
Group Delay Distortion
0 to 0.3msec. (500 to 2,800 Hz)
Total Distortion
25 dB (Input signal:-45 dBm0)/40 dB
(input signal:0 dBm0)
Idle Channel Noise
-67 dBmop or less (psophometric noise)
-50 dBm0 or less (single frequency noise)
Impulsive Noise
0 counts at -35 dBm
Cross Talk Attenuation
90 dB or more
Inter-modulation Products
-40 dB or more
Spurious In-Band Signals
-49 dBm0 or less
Attenuation rate: 12 dB per octave or
more at 3.4 kHz above
Attenuation level: -40 dBm or less at 3.4
kHz and above -70 dBm or less at 50 kHz
and above
Return Loss
Signal Attenuation
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 167
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
System Capacity
IPS System Capacity (Single MP System)
Item
LT Card
AP Card
(No. of Ports)
(No. of Cards)
(No. of Ports)
(No. of Cards)
Total Number of Lines (Analog Single Line Tel. + Dterm)
IP PAD (No. of Channel)
Note 2
Analog Single Line Telephone
Standard
(Lines)
Long Note 3
Standard
Dterm (Lines)
Long
DtermIP/ INASET/ SP30 (Peer to Peer Connection)
Dterm PS
Zone Transceiver (ZT)
P-P Connection
ISDN Terminal (2ILCC)
P-MP Connection
Loop Start
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
DID w/4DIT
2W or 4W E&M
Tie Line Trunk (Lines)
Type 1 w/PW122
CCIS Trunk (Peer to Peer Connection)
1.5M
DTI/CCIS Digital Link Note 4
2M
1.5M (PRT)
ISDN
4BRT (card)
IP Trunk
PFT Connections
8PFT
3-Party Conference
8-Party Conference Group
32-Party Conference Group
DTMF Sender
DTMF Receiver
SN716 Desk Console
Attendant Terminal (Dterm ATT Position)
System Capacity Note 1
1PIM 2PIM 3PIM 4PIM 5PIM 6PIM 7PIM 8PIM
64
128
192
256
320
384
448
512
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
Max. 256 ports per system
12
24
64
128
192
256
320
384
448
512
64
128
192
256
64
128
192
256
320
384
448
512
48
96
144
192
240
288
336
384
64
128
192
256
320
384
448
512
24
952
48
888
72
824
16
32
48
24
48
64
48
48
12
32
64
128
96
96
24
32
64
192
144
144
36
96
120
760
696
512
64
80
144
632
168
568
192
504
96
112
128
32
32
32
32
64
64
64
64
256
256
256
256
192
240
256
256
192
240
256
256
48
60
72
84
Max. 127
DTI: 10, CCIS: 8
8
8
6
12
18
24
24
24
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
Max. 16 conference groups per system
Max. 8 conference group per system
Max. 8 conference group per system
Max. 32 circuits per system
16
DTMF Receiver
8
Max. 8 sets per system
32
64
256
256
256
96
Note 1: "PIM" in this table means "Physical PIM."
Note 2: Number of IP PAD card is maximum 2 per FP.
Note 3: Message Waiting Lamp is not available when the 4LLC is mounted in slot 08 to 11.
Note 4: The total number of trunk line and DTI channel shall be 256 or less. (Each trunk line and DTI
channel are required to assign the “Trunk Number” by system data programming and maximum
number of system parameter for “Trunk Number” is 256.)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 168
24
8
64
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
IPS System Capacity (Single MP System cont’d.)
Item
SMDR Interface
PMS Interface
ACD / MIS or OAI Interface
Note 5
Remote PIM over IP (Number of Sites)
DID Dial Conversion
Call Forwarding-Outside Set
Authorization Code / Forced Account Code /
Remote Access to System (DISA) Code
Message Reminder Set
Name Display / Guest Name Display
Speed Calling-Station (Station Speed Dial) Set
MP built-in SMDR Call Record
System Capacity
1PIM 2PIM 3PIM 4PIM 5PIM 6PIM 7PIM 8PIM
Max. 2 interface ports (RS-232C)
/ Max.1 interface port (IP) per system
Max. 1 interface port (RS-232C)
/ Max. 1 interface port (IP) -per system
Max. 1 interface port per system
Up to 30 (depending on network configurations)
1000
496
3000
1024
512
10000
1024
Note 5: It is possible to connect 4 applications at the same time.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 169
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
IPS System Capacity (Dual MP System)
Item
LT Card
AP Card
(No. of Ports)
(No. of Cards)
(No. of Ports)
(No. of Cards)
Total Number of Lines (Analog Single Line Tel. + Dterm)
IP PAD (No. of Channel)
Note 2
Analog Single Line Telephone
Standard
(Lines)
Long Note 3
Standard
Dterm (Lines)
Long
DtermIP/ INASET / SP30 (Peer to Peer Connection)
Dterm PS
Zone Transceiver (ZT)
P-P Connection
ISDN Terminal (2ILCC)
P-MP Connection
Loop Start
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
DID w/4DIT
2W or 4W E&M
Tie Line Trunk (Lines)
Type 1 w/PW122
CCIS Trunk (Peer to Peer Connection)
1.5M
DTI/CCIS Digital Link Note 4
2M
1.5 (PRT)
ISDN
4BRT (card)
IP Trunk
PFT Connections
8PFT
3-Party Conference
8-Party Conference Group
32-Party Conference Group
DTMF Sender
DTMF Receiver
SN716 Desk Console
Attendant Terminal (Dterm ATT Position)
System Capacity Note 1
1PIM 2PIM 3PIM 4PIM 5PIM 6PIM 7PIM 8PIM
64
128
192
256
320
384
448
512
11
23
35
47
59
71
83
95
Max. 256 ports per system
11
23
24
64
128
192
256
320
384
448
512
64
128
192
256
64
128
192
256
320
384
448
512
44
92
140
188
236
284
332
380
64
128
192
256
320
384
448
512
22
952
46
888
70
824
16
32
48
24
48
64
44
48
12
32
64
128
92
96
24
32
64
192
140
144
36
94
760
118
696
512
64
80
142
632
166
568
190
504
96
112
128
32
32
32
32
64
64
64
64
256
256
256
256
188
236
256
256
192
240
256
256
48
60
72
84
Max. 127
DTI: 10, CCIS: 8
8
8
6
12
18
24
24
24
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
16
24
32
40
48
56
Max. 16 conference groups per system
Max. 8 conference group per system
Max. 8 conference group per system
Max. 32 circuits per system
16
32
8
Max. 8 sets per system
32
64
256
256
256
96
Note 1: "PIM" in this table means "Physical PIM."
Note 2: Number of IP PAD card is maximum 2 per FP.
Note 3: Message Waiting Lamp is not available when the 4LLC is mounted in slot 08 to 11.
Note 4: The total number of trunk line and DTI channel shall be 256 or less. (Each trunk line and DTI
channel are required to assign the “Trunk Number” by system data programming and maximum
number of system parameter for “Trunk Number” is 256.)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 170
24
8
64
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
IPS System Capacity (Dual MP System, Cont’d)
Item
SMDR Interface
PMS Interface
ACD / MIS or OAI Interface
Note 5
Remote PIM over IP (Number of Sites)
DID Dial Conversion
Call Forwarding-Outside Set
Authorization Code / Forced Account Code / Remote
Access to System (DISA) Code
Message Reminder Set
Name Display / Guest Name Display
Speed Calling-Station (Station Speed Dial) Set
MP built-in SMDR Call Record
System Capacity
1PIM 2PIM 3PIM 4PIM 5PIM 6PIM 7PIM 8PIM
Max. 2 interface ports per system (RS-232C)
Max.1 port per system (IP)
Max. 1 interface port (RS-232C)
/ Max. 1 interface port (IP) -per system
Max. 1 interface port per system
Up to 30 (depending on network configurations)
1000
496
3000
1024
512
10000
1024
Note 5: It is possible to connect 4 applications at the same time.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 171
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
IPSDML System Capacity
Item
Physical Module Chassis
Physical MC Port for Line/Trunk
Built in FP (on MP)
FP card (PN-CP33)
IP PAD (No. of Channel)
Note 2
Analog Single Line Telephone
Standard
(Lines)
Long
Standard
Dterm (Lines)
Long
DSS/BLF Console
DtermIP/ INASET / SP30 (Peer to Peer Connection)
Dterm PS
Zone Transceiver (ZT)
P-P Connection
ISDN Terminal (2ILCC)
P-MP Connection
Loop Start
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
DID w/4DIT
2W or 4W E&M
Tie Line Trunk (Lines)
Type 1 w/PW122
CCIS Trunk (Peer to Peer Connection)
DTI/CCIS Digital Link Note 3
1.5M
1.5 (PRT)
ISDN
4BRT (card)
IP Trunk (IPT card or H.323 card)
PFT Connections
4PFTA
3-Party Conference
8-Party Conference Group
32-Party Conference Group
DTMF Sender
DTMF Receiver
SN716 Desk Console
Attendant Terminal (Dterm ATT Position)
System Capacity Note 1
1 MC 2 MC 3 MC 4 MC 5 MC 6 MC 7 MC 8 MC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
48
104
160
216
272
328
384
440
1
0
1
2
3
32
64
128
192
256
48
104
160
216
272
328
384
440
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
48
104
160
216
272
328
384
440
8
16
24
8
956
32
40
16
892
828
48
56
24
764
64
32
700
636
572
508
80
96
112
128
512
16
32
12
24
48
24
24
4
26
52
104
52
52
8
48
64
32
64
160
80
80
12
216
256
108
136
164
192
108
136
164
192
16
20
24
28
Max. 127
DTI: 10, CCIS: 8
8 Main, 32 Total
5
10
15
20
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
Max. 16 conference groups per system
Max. 8 conference group per system
Max. 8 conference group per system
Max. 32 circuits per system
16
32
8
Max. 8 sets per system
Note 1: "MC" in this table means "Physical Module Chassis."
Note 2: Number of IP PAD card is maximum 2 per FP.
Note 3: The total number of trunk line and DTI channel shall be 256 or less. (Each trunk line and DTI
channel are required to assign the “Trunk Number” by system data programming and maximum
number of system parameter for “Trunk Number” is 256.)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 172
220
220
32
8
32
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
IPSDML System Capacity (Cont’d.)
Item
SMDR Interface
PMS Interface
ACD / MIS or OAI Interface
Note 4
Remote PIM over IP (Number of Sites)
DID Dial Conversion
Call Forwarding-Outside Set
Authorization Code / Forced Account Code /
Remote Access to System (DISA) Code
Message Reminder Set
Name Display / Guest Name Display
Speed Calling-Station (Station Speed Dial) Set
MP built-in SMDR Call Record
System Capacity
1 MC 2 MC 3 MC 4 MC 5 MC 6 MC 7 MC 8 MC
Max. 2 interface ports per system (RS-232C)
Max.1 port per system (IP)
Max. 1 interface port (RS-232C)
/ Max. 1 interface port (IP) -per system
Max. 1 interface port per system
Up to 30 (depending on network configurations)
1000
496
3000
1024
512
10000
1024
Note 4: It is possible to connect 4 applications at the same time.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 173
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
IP Remote Network Capacity
Total System Capacity (Main plus Remote)
Item
LT Ports
AP Ports
Analog Single Line Tel. + Dterm (all stations)
IP PAD (No. of Channel)
DtermIP/INASET (PTP Connection)
PS
Zone Transceiver (ZT)
ISDN Terminal
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
Tie Line Trunk (Lines)
2W/4W E&M
CCIS Trunk (Peer to Peer Connection)
DTI/CCIS Digital Link
1.5M/2M
1.5M (PRT)
ISDN
4BRT (card)
IP Trunk
PFT Connections
3-Party Conference
8-Party Conference Group
32-Party Conference
DTMF Sender/Receiver
Attendant Consoles
Attendant Terminal (Dterm ATT Position)
SMDR Interface
PMS Interface
ACD / MIS or OAI Interface
Remote PIM over IP
DID Dial Conversion
Call Forwarding-Outside Set
Authorization Code / Forced Account Code /
Remote Access to System(DISA)Code
Message Reminder Set
Name Display / Guest Name Display
Speed Calling-Station (Station Speed Dial) Set
MP built-in SMDR Call Record
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Capacity
1020
256 per site
980
256
952
512
128
64
256
192
127
DTI: 10/CCIS: 8 Links
8 Main / 32 Total
24
8
64
Max. 16 conference groups
Max. 8 conference groups
Max. 8 conference groups
Max. 32 circuits
8
Max. 8 sets
Max. 2 interface ports per system (RS-232C)
Max.1 port per system (IP)
Max. 1 interface port (RS-232C)
/ Max. 1 interface port (IP) -per system
Max. 1 interface port
Up to 30 (depending on network)
1000
496
3000
1024
512
10000
1024
Page 174
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
IPSDMR Capacity
Number of PHYSICAL MODULAR CHASSIS
LT card
Note 1
AP card
IP-PAD
Analog Single Line Telephone (Lines)
Dterm (Lines)
No. of ports
No. of cards
No. of ports
Capacity Per MC
1
No. of cards
7
14
No. of channel
8LC Note 2
Standard
32
48
48
64
104
104
DtermIP/ INASET (Peer to Peer Connection) Note 3
Loop Start
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
DTI
ISDN
2
56
112
7
14
Max. 256 ports per site
128
48
104
DID w/4DIT
28
56
2W/4W E&M
12
24
1.5M
6
1.5M(PRT)
4BRT (card)
PFT Connections
8
6
5
10
4
8
Note 1: Each Modular Chassis has 24 Virtual LT Ports that can only be used to expand the PAD
channels from 8 to 32 using the 8IPLA w/24IPLA.
Note 2: Message Waiting Indication available via Stutter Dial Tone.
Note 3: Remote PIMs Support up to 2 Virtual PIMs for assignment of DtermIP/ INASET only.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 175
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
IPS PIMMJ (As Remote PIM) Capacity
Capacity Per PIM
Number of PHYSICAL PIMS
LT card
AP card
IP-PAD
Analog Single Line Telephone (Lines)
Dterm (Lines)
1
No. of ports
No. of cards
No. of ports
No. of cards
12
24
No. of channel
8LC
Standard
32
64
64
64
128
128
Long Line
24
48
DtermIP/ INASET (Peer to Peer Connection) Note 1
Central Office Trunk (Lines)
DTI
ISDN
PFT Connections
2
64
128
8
16
Max. 256 ports per site
128
Loop Start
64
128
DID w/4DIT
48
96
2W/4W E&M
24
48
1.5M
10
1.5M(PRT)
4BRT (card)
6
6
12
8
16
Note 1: Remote PIMs Support up to 2 Virtual PIMs for assignment of DtermIP/ INASET only.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 176
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
System Capacity (Cont’d)
CCIS (p-p/p-mp) and Peer-to-Peer
Payload Size
G.729a
G.711
G.723.1
20 ms
8 Channel
8 Channel
------
30 ms
16 Channel
16 Channel
16 Channel
40 ms
16 Channel
16 Channel
------
Payload Size
G.729a
G.711
G.723.1
20 ms
6 Channel
5 Channel
---
30 ms
8 Channel
7 Channel
8 Channel
40 ms
12 Channel
10 Channel
---
VoIP (H.323)
Payload size for Virtual IPT
Payload Size
10 ms.
Max. Voice Channels Per IPT
G.729a
G.711
G.723.1
4
4
–
20 ms.
8
8
–
30 ms.
16
16
16
40 ms.
16
16
–
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 177
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
IP Specifications
Item
Voice Encoding
IP-PAD
Specifications
Remarks
G.729a
G.723.1 (5.3 k/6.3 k)
G.711
32 channels per card
Automatically seized per call
FAX
Communication
Feature
FAX Relay Method (T.30)
DTMF Signal
H.245
IP
H.245
Inter-office/Intra-office
Signaling
PROTIMS over IP
CCIS over IP
H.323
Jitter Control
Dynamic Jitter Buffer
QoS
(Quality of Service)
• TOS, IP Precedence
• DiffServ
LAN Interface
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Echo Canceller
(IP-PAD)
G.168
DtermIP/CCIS
Virtual IPT
Payload
Size
H.323 IPT
PAD Control
8 kbps CS-ACELP
MP-MLQ/ACELP
64 kbps PCM
PAD card is required.
G3 FAX (up to 14.4 kbps)
Super G3 Reciprocal: Not allowed
H.323 IPT/IP-PAD/DtermIP
DtermIP to DtermIP connection
DtermIP to IP-PAD connection
DtermIP to UNIVERGE NEAX
2000 IPS connection
Point to Multipoint connection
H.323 IPT card and IP-PAD card
are required
Auto Negotiation is available.
100BASE-TX is recommended.
0 dB to +16 dB (+2 dB unit)
0 dB to –16 dB (–2 dB unit)
Max. voice channels per card
10 ms: 12 ch
20 ms: 20 ch
30 ms: 30 ch
40 ms: 32 ch
Maximum voice channels per card
G.729a G.711
G.723.1
20 ms.: 6ch
5ch
30 ms.: 8ch
7ch
8ch
40 ms.: 12ch
10ch
Setting is available per Location
No.
0 dB to –16 dB
For connection via the IPT card
10 ms-40 ms
(G.723.1: 30 ms unit)
20 ms.-40 ms. (10 ms.
increments)
(G.723.1: 30 ms. fixed)
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 178
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML/IPSDMR System Specifications
Item
Specifications
DML
System Capacity
LT ports: Max. 56 ports / MODULAR CHASSIS,
- (Max. 64 ports including 8 virtual LT ports/Modular Chassis)
- Max. 440 ports / system (IPSDML)
- AP ports: Max. 256 ports / system
- IP ports: Max. 952 ports (IPSDML)
- Card slots: 8 slots / MODULAR CHASSIS
(including 1 slot for MP card)
DMR
System Capacity
LT ports: Max. 56 ports / MODULAR CHASSIS,
- (Max. 64 ports including 8 virtual LT ports/Modular Chassis)
- Max. 112 ports / system (IPSDMR)
- AP ports: Max. 256 ports / system
- IP ports: Max. 128 ports (IPSDMR)
- Card slots: 8 slots / MODULAR CHASSIS
(including 1 slot for MP card)
Circuit Card
Mounted in
Modular Chassis
All LT/AP cards of the UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS can be used
for the IPSDML with the exception of 4LLCB and 4ODTAcards.
Power
AC100V – 240V (automatically adjusted)
Installation Method
Desk top-setting, 19” rack-mounting
Conditions
Temperature: 5°C – 40°C (when the system is operating)
Humidity: 20% - 80% (when the system is operating)
Cooling
Cooling by FAN
Safety Standard
Complied with UL60950, CSA22.2 No. 950, EN60950, AS3260
EMC
Complied with VCCI Class A, FCC Part 15 Class A, EN55022
Class A, AS/NZS 3548 Class A
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 179
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
Line Conditions
Description
Specifications
Loop Resistance (including Telephone Set)
Analog Standard Line
Max. 600 ohms
Analog Long Line
Max. 2,500 ohms (DP 10pps),
Max. 1,700 ohms (DP 20pps)
Max. 1,200 ohms (DTMF)
Loop Resistance (including Opposite End Resistance)
Central Office Trunk
Max. 1,700 ohms
Tie Line Trunk (Loop Dial)
Max. 2,500 ohms
Tie Line Trunk (E&M)
Max. 900 ohms (only E-wire condition)
Cable Length
Note 1
SN716 Desk Console
8DLC/4DLC/2DLC Card
4DLC/2DLC Card with
AC Adapter
Dterm Series i/E
Note 2
8DLC/4DLC Card
2DLC Card
4DLC/2DLC Card with
AC Adapter
DSS/BLF Console
4DLC/2DLC Card with
AC Adapter
Zone Transceiver
ZTII-U (for U-Interface)
Max. 350 meters
(Max. 300 meters for 8DLC card)
Max. 1,200 meters
Max. 200 meters
(Max. 300 meters for Dterm 8 and Dterm 8D)
Max. 850 meters
Max. 1,200 meters
Max. 1,200 meters
Max. 1,210 meters (2-wire), Max. 2,
100 meters (4-wire) @-48V
Max. 970 meters (2-wire), Max.
1,700 meters (4-wire) @-45V
ZTII-U with AC Adapter
Max. 3,950 meters
Note 1: Cable length is based on cable with 0.5mm diameter and without lightning arresters
Note 2: DTR-2DT and DTR-4D terminals do not support long line adapters.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 180
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
Zone Transceiver Line Conditions
Zone Transceiver Line Conditions
PBX Power Supply at –48V (Standard)
0.4φ
U-Interface
Line Conditions
2 Wire
4 Wire
762m (2500ft)
1310m (4300ft)
0.5φ
1219m (4000ft)
2103m (6900ft)
0.65φ
1676m (5500ft)
2895m (9500ft)
0.9φ
PBX Power Supply at –45V (Note)
2438m (8000ft)
2 Wire
3958m (13000ft)
4 Wire
0.4φ
609m (2000ft)
1066m (3500ft)
0.5φ
975m (3200ft)
1706m (5600ft)
0.65φ
1432m (4700ft)
2499m (8200ft)
0.9φ
PBX Power Supply at –43V (Note)
2131m (7000ft)
2 Wire
3718m (12200ft)
4 Wire
0.4φ
548m (1800ft)
944m (3100ft)
0.5φ
883m (2900ft)
1524m (5000ft)
0.65φ
1340m (4400ft)
2316m (7600ft)
0.9φ
Local Power Supply
(with AC Adapter)
1948m (6400ft)
3352m (11000ft)
0.4φ
3350m (11000ft)
0.5φ
3958m (13000ft)
0.65φ
3958m (13000ft)
0.9φ
3958m (13000ft)
Note: Zone Transceiver is provided –48V power in normal condition. The table at –45V
and at –43V show ZT Line Conditions in the event of lower voltage status.
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 181
CHAPTER 7 SPECIFICATIONS
Traffic Capacity
Traffic Capacity
Number of
PIMs
1PIM
Traffic
Capacity
2PIM
Max. 2500
BHCA
3PIM
4PIM
5PIM
6PIM
Max. 7500
BHCA
Note
Max. 5000
BHCA
Note
7PIM
8PIM
Max. 8000
BHCA
Note
Note: The traffic load of each FP shall be 2500 BHCA or less.
DRS (Device Registration Server)
DRS (Device Registration Server)-System Based
Features of Built-in DRS
Description
Remarks
MP
952 with
CP24D/CP27B/CP31E
128 with CP31D
Login without password
Not Available
Use blank as a password
Authentication by DRS-Network Based
Not Available
Authentication by DRS-System Based
Available
Authentication by MAC Address
Available
Confirmation when overriding
Available
Dialing Log-out feature access code
Available
Function key
Available
Soft key
Available
Inter-working with DHCP server
Available
Max Registration Terminal
Log-in
Log-out
DHCP
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 182
CHAPTER 8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Chapter 8 System Performance
Transmission Characteristics
Transmission Characteristics
Cross Talk
Attenuation
More than 70 dB at 1000 Hz
Idle Circuit Noise
Less than -65 dBm
Insertion Loss
(relative to 1KHz-10
dBm)
Longitudinal Balance
Trunk Side
PCM Characteristics
Station-to-Station - Typical 6 dB
Station-to-Trunk - Typical 0.5 dB
Trunk-to-Trunk - Typical 0.5 dB at 0 dB PAD control
Better than 58 dB
Line Rate - 1.544 Mbps
µ-Law
Meets North America TI-04 Standards
Return Loss
More than 15 dB (300 ~ 3,400 Hz)
Line Impedance
Station: 600 W
Trunk: 600 or 900 W
Leakage Resistance
More than 20,000 W
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 183
CHAPTER 8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Rotary Dial Pulse and DTMF Signaling
(1) Rotary Dial Signal
Specifications
Description
Receiving
Sending
Dial Speed
9 to 22 pps
10 pps +/- 0.8pps
20 pps +/- 0.8 pps
Break Ratio
55 to 77 %
67 +/- 3% or 62 +/- 3%
Inter-Digit Pause
Min. 256 msec.
300 to 1,000 msec.(10 pps)
Switch-Hook Flash
Detection
384 to 2,300 msec.
Not applicable
(2) DTMF Signaling
Specifications
Description
Receiving
Sending
High Frequency Group
1,209Hz
1
4
7
*
1,336Hz
2
5
8
0
1,477Hz
3
6
9
#
Low Frequency Group
697Hz
770Hz
852Hz
941Hz
Frequency
Deviation
+/- 1.8 %
+/- 0.8 %
Signal Duration
Min. 40 msec.
64 or 128 milli-sec.
Inter-Digit Pause
Min. 40 msec.
32 to 240 msec.
Signal Level
-46 to -5 dBm
-10 dBm (low group)
- 8 dBm (high group)
Unwanted
Frequency
Components
Not Applicable
40 dB below the power of signal frequency
Signal Code
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 184
CHAPTER 8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Multi-frequency Compelled (MFC) – R2 SIGNAL
(1) MFC Frequency Value
Frequencies
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
Forward
Signals(Hz)
1,380
1,500
1,620
1,740
1,860
1,980
Backward
Signals(Hz)
1,140
1,020
900
780
660
540
(2) MFC Combinations
Combination
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Frequencies
F0 + F1
F0 + F2
F1 + F2
F0 + F3
F1 + F3
F2 + F3
F0 + F4
F1 + F4
F2 + F4
F3 + F4
F0 + F5
F1 + F5
F2 + F5
F3 + F5
F4 + F5
(3) Sender/Receiver Specifications
Description
Specifications
Sender
Sender Transmitted Level
-8 dbm to -11.5 dBm
Frequency Variation
Receiver
+/- 2 Hz
Sensitivity Range
-35 dBm to 0 dBm
Frequency Variation
+/- 12 dBm
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 185
CHAPTER 8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Audible Tones and Ringing Signal
Audible Tones
Specifications of Audible Tone
TONE
FREQUENCY
INTERRUPTION
Dial Tone (DT)
350 Hz mixed with 440 Hz
Continuous
Special Dial Tone (SDT)
350 Hz mixed with 440 Hz
0.125 sec. ON, 0.125 sec. OFF
Busy Tone (BT)
480 Hz mixed with 620 Hz
0.5 sec. ON, 0.5 sec. OFF
Reorder Tone (ROT)
480 Hz mixed with 620 Hz
2.5 sec. ON, 0.25 sec. OFF
Howler Tone (HWT)
2,400 Hz interrupted by 16 Hz
Continuous
Service Set Tone (SST)
350 Hz mixed with 440 Hz
Continuous
Ring Back Tone (RBT)
440 Hz mixed with 480 Hz
1 sec. ON, 3 sec. OFF
Hold Tone (HDT)
480 Hz mixed with 620 Hz
Second Dial Tone
440 Hz mixed with 480 Hz
Call Waiting Ring Back
Tone
440 Hz mixed with 480 Hz
0.25 sec. ON, 0.25 sec. OFF
0.25 sec. ON, 1.25 sec. OFF
0.25 sec. ON, 0.25 sec. OFF
0.25 sec. ON, 1.25 sec. OFF
1 sec. ON, 1 sec. OFF
Ringing Signal
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Frequency
20 Hz (Nominal)
Voltage
75 Vrms (Nominal)
Interruption:
2 sec. ON, 4 sec. OFF (for external call)
1 sec. ON, 2 sec. OFF (for internal call)
Note: The 2000 IPS has the capability to detect the above type of signal from Central Office and
to transmit the above type of signal to PBX stations.
Built-In Modem on MP Card
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATIONS
MODEM
33.6 kbps
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
Page 186
CHAPTER 8 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
Dimensions and Weight
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS
Main Equipment
Dimensions (W x D x H: mm)
PIM
Approx. 430 x 223 x 353
(Fully card-mounted)
(16.9” x 8.8” x 13.9”)
Approx. 430 x 205.2 x 61.6
BASE
(16.9” x 8.08” x 2.43”)
Approx. 435 x 224.6 x 66.2
BASE TRAY (for UL)
(17.1“ x 8.84 x 2.6”)
Weight (kg)
Approx. 11.5
(25.35 lbs)
Approx. 3.0
(6.61 lbs)
Approx. 1.7
(3.75 lbs)
UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML/IPSDMR
Main Equipment
Dimensions
(W x D x H; mm)
Weight (kg)
UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDML
UNIVERGE NEAX IPSDMR
430(W) x 365(D) x 88(H) mm
Approximately 7Kg /
Modular Chassis
(when all slots are occupied)
Heat Dissipation
PIM NO.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MAX. AC POWER
CONSUMPTION (W/h)*
360
720
1080
1440
1800
2160
2520
2880
UNIVERGE NEAX 2000 IPS General Description
Issue 5
MAX BTU (BTU/h)
1226
2452
3678
4904
6130
7356
8582
9805
Page 187
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement